WO2021072629A1 - Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection - Google Patents

Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021072629A1
WO2021072629A1 PCT/CN2019/111225 CN2019111225W WO2021072629A1 WO 2021072629 A1 WO2021072629 A1 WO 2021072629A1 CN 2019111225 W CN2019111225 W CN 2019111225W WO 2021072629 A1 WO2021072629 A1 WO 2021072629A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
user identity
user
rrc
rrc connection
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/111225
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
胡星星
曾清海
张宏平
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2019/111225 priority Critical patent/WO2021072629A1/en
Priority to CN201980101251.XA priority patent/CN114586469B/en
Publication of WO2021072629A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021072629A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02Terminal devices
    • H04W88/06Terminal devices adapted for operation in multiple networks or having at least two operational modes, e.g. multi-mode terminals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/08Access point devices
    • H04W88/10Access point devices adapted for operation in multiple networks, e.g. multi-mode access points

Definitions

  • This application relates to the communication field, and more specifically, to a method and apparatus for establishing a radio resource control connection in the communication field.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • Terminal devices such as mobile phones
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the process for the terminal device to establish a radio resource control (RRC) connection includes initiating a random access process and after the random access is completed, the terminal device and the network device exchange messages to establish an RRC connection, and so on.
  • Random access includes random access based on contention or non-competition. For random access based on contention, terminal equipment needs to compete for random access resources for multiple SIM cards due to limited resources, which will increase the delay of random access and even cause random access.
  • the present application provides a method and device for establishing an RRC connection, which can reduce the signaling overhead of establishing an RRC connection, and also reduces the delay of random access, which is beneficial to improving transmission performance.
  • a method for establishing an RRC connection is provided, the method is applicable to a terminal device, and the terminal device supports a first user identity and a second user identity, and the method includes:
  • the terminal device receives the first RRC message of the first user identity from the network device as the first user identity, the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used by the terminal device as the second user identity Establish an RRC connection; the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user.
  • the terminal device can establish the RRC connection of the second user identity according to the configuration information included in the first RRC message of the first user identity as the second user identity, avoiding the need for the terminal device to Re-initiating random access as the second user and re-establishing an RRC connection independently can also avoid the failure of the terminal device to initiate random access as the second user, which is beneficial to improve the success rate of random access, even if the terminal device does not use
  • the random access initiated by the second user identity directly inherits the RRC connection of the first user identity, which can also avoid the resource overhead caused by the random access, thereby helping to improve the transmission performance.
  • the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device inherits the RRC connection established by the first user identity as the second user identity, and the terminal device does not need to initiate a random connection as the second user identity. In, there is no need to establish an RRC connection as the second user. In this case, the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device as the second user to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
  • the terminal device establishing an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user can be understood as: the terminal device uses both the first user identity and the second user identity to use the terminal device to establish the RRC connection with the first user identity at the same time, then the terminal device The second user identity is not used to initiate random access, and the RRC connection does not need to be established again as the second user identity.
  • the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device uses the first user identity and the second user identity in a time-division multiplexing manner to use the terminal device as the first user identity.
  • the terminal device establishing an RRC connection as the second user according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device uses the configuration information to initiate random access as the second user, and the configuration information may include random access channel resources (random access channel, RACH), without the need to use competition to obtain resources for initiating random access, which can improve the success rate of random access and reduce the delay of random access.
  • RACH random access channel
  • the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information may be understood as: the terminal device uses the configuration information to establish the RRC connection as the second user identity.
  • the configuration information may include 2.
  • the uplink authorization information for establishing the RRC connection with the user identity and the temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of the cell used for the terminal device to establish the RRC connection as the second user identity, so that the terminal device does not need to initiate random access as the second user identity Directly send the RRC connection establishment request or the RRC reestablishment request or the RRC recovery request of the second user identity to the network device according to the resources indicated by the uplink authorization information, and the terminal device can use the C-RNTI to communicate with the network device as the second user identity.
  • the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information includes: the terminal device uses the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information to For the RRC connection established with the identity of the first user, the terminal device can use the RRC connection established with the identity of the first user by the terminal device as the first user. That is, the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity in a simultaneous use of the first user identity and the second user identity or in a time division multiplexing manner.
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device
  • the second RRC message includes the configuration information
  • the method further includes: The terminal device determines, according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message, that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established with the first user identity by the terminal device as the second user identity.
  • the RRC connection established as the first user using the terminal device as the second user can be determined through the nesting of RRC messages.
  • the first RRC message includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used by the terminal device in the Establishing an RRC connection with a second user identity
  • the method further includes: the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, that the terminal device can use the terminal device as the second user to establish an RRC connection with the first user identity.
  • RRC connection That is, the RRC connection established as the first user using the terminal device as the second user can be determined through an explicit indication in the first RRC message.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device determines that the terminal device can use the terminal device as the second user according to the position of the cell where the configuration information is located in the first RRC message.
  • the terminal device determines that the terminal device can use the terminal device as the second user according to the position of the cell where the configuration information is located in the first RRC message.
  • the information elements where the configuration information of the different user identities of the terminal device are located are in different positions of the first RRC message.
  • the protocol may stipulate that the information elements in which the network equipment configures the configuration information of different user identities of the terminal equipment are located in different positions of the first RRC message.
  • the first RRC message includes a correspondence
  • the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate different logical channels of the same bearer Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding The relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the corresponding relationship is used for the terminal device to determine the first User identity or said second user identity.
  • the terminal device can follow the corresponding The relationship determines whether the data packet belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
  • the key information may include the key of the second user identity (for example, the network device may derive the key of the second user identity according to the key of the first user identity) or include the key used to generate the second user identity. Key information or parameters, etc.
  • the terminal device can modify the protocol stack parameters of the first user identity to the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity included in the configuration information, so that the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity can be obtained.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives a third RRC message from the network device as the first user identity, the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first user A paging message carries the identity of the second user of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may page the second user identity
  • the paging information of the terminal device is carried in the third RRC message of the first user identity, so as to prevent the network device from being unable to page the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the method before the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user identity, the method further includes: The network device sends a fourth RRC message, where the fourth RRC message includes minimizing drive test MDT information or radio link failure information or access failure information of the second user identity of the terminal device. In this way, the MDT information or the wireless link failure information or the access failure information of the second user identity can be prevented from being outdated or deleted.
  • the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device or to Instruct the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device to enter an inactive state.
  • the first RRC message may include the NAS message of the first user identity, may also include the NAS message of the first user identity and the NAS message of the second user identity, and may also include the NAS message of the second user identity.
  • the terminal device needs to determine whether the NAS message in the first RRC message belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity.
  • the terminal device can determine according to the fifth RRC message included in the first RRC message.
  • the NAS message is the NAS message of the second user identity. That is, the user identity of the NAS message can be determined through the nesting of the RRC message.
  • the first RRC message includes second indication information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the NAS message included in the first RRC message is a NAS message with a second user identity, so that the terminal The device can determine that the NAS message is of the second user identity according to the second indication information included in the first RRC message. That is, the explicit indication in the first RRC message can be used to determine whether the NAS message belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity.
  • the information elements of the NAS messages of different user identities of the terminal equipment are located in different positions of the first RRC message, and the terminal equipment is based on the information element of the NAS message located in the first RRC message.
  • the location determines whether the NAS message is the identity of the first user or the identity of the second user.
  • the protocol may stipulate that the network device configures the cell in which the NAS message of different user identities of the terminal device is located in different positions of the first RRC message.
  • a method for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection is provided, which is characterized by comprising: a network device acquiring configuration information, where the configuration information is used by a terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as a second user;
  • the network device sends a first RRC message to a terminal device with a first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
  • the method before the network device sends the first RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, the method further includes:
  • the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity, and a random access channel RACH resource for the terminal device to use the second user identity.
  • the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device as the second user to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes the configuration information.
  • the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used for the terminal device to use the second indication information.
  • the user identity establishes an RRC connection.
  • the first RRC message includes a correspondence
  • the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate different logical channels of the same bearer Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or The correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used by the terminal device to determine the first A user identity or the second user identity.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
  • the configuration information includes the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity
  • the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity are radio link control RLC layer parameters, media access control MAC layer
  • the network device acquiring configuration information includes:
  • the network device sends a request message to the distribution unit DU, where the request message is used to request the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging information carries the second paging information of the terminal device.
  • the identity of the user is not limited to the third RRC message.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device determines the MDT information of the second user identity according to the fourth RRC message.
  • the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device or to Instruct the first user identity of the terminal device to enter the RRC inactive state.
  • the present application provides an apparatus for establishing an RRC connection, including a transceiver unit and an establishment unit, where the transceiver unit is configured to receive the first radio resource control RRC of the first user identity from a network device as the first user identity Message, the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used by the device to establish an RRC connection as the second user; an establishment unit is used to establish an RRC connection as the second user according to the configuration information RRC connection.
  • the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource for the establishment unit to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user, and a resource for the establishment unit to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user. At least one of the uplink authorization information and the temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of the cell used for the establishment unit to establish the RRC connection with the identity of the second user.
  • the configuration information is used to instruct the apparatus to use the RRC connection established by the apparatus as the first user as the second user;
  • the establishing unit is specifically configured to: use the apparatus to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the first user using the identity of the second user according to the configuration information.
  • the establishing unit is specifically configured to: use the device as the second user to establish the RRC connection as the first user according to the configuration information, and the device can use the RRC connection as the first user as the first user.
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the apparatus
  • the second RRC message includes the configuration information
  • the apparatus further includes:
  • the determining unit is configured to determine, according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message, that the device can use the device as the second user identity to establish the RRC connection established with the first user identity.
  • the first RRC message includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used by the device to communicate with the second user.
  • the identity establishes an RRC connection
  • the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the first indication information, that the device can use the device as the second user to establish the RRC connection with the first user.
  • the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the position of the cell where the configuration information is located in the first RRC message, that the device can use the device as the second user For the RRC connection established by the first user identity, the information elements where the configuration information of the different user identities of the device are located are in different positions of the first RRC message.
  • the first RRC message includes a correspondence
  • the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate different logical channels of the same bearer Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding The relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the corresponding relationship is used by the device to determine the first user identity or The identity of the second user.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to receive a third RRC message from the network device as the first user, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging The information carries the identifier of the second user identity of the device.
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to send a fourth user identity to the network device as the first user before establishing an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user identity.
  • the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the device or to indicate The RRC connection of the first user identity of the device enters an inactive state.
  • the present application provides an apparatus for establishing an RRC connection, including: an obtaining unit, configured to obtain configuration information, where the configuration information is used by a terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as a second user; Sending a first RRC message to a terminal device with a first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
  • the apparatus further includes a determining unit configured to determine that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the first user identity before the first RRC message is sent to the first user identity terminal device. The second user identity.
  • the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity, and a random access channel RACH resource for the terminal device to use the second user identity.
  • the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device as the second user to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes the configuration information.
  • the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used for the terminal device to use the second indication information.
  • the user identity establishes an RRC connection.
  • the first RRC message includes a correspondence
  • the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate different logical channels of the same bearer Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or The correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used by the terminal device to determine the first A user identity or the second user identity.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
  • the acquiring unit is further configured to send a request message to the distribution unit DU, where the request message is used to request the protocol stack parameter of the second user identity.
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to send a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging The information carries the identifier of the second user identity of the terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to receive a fourth RRC message sent by the terminal device of the first user identity, where the fourth RRC message includes the second user identity of the terminal device Minimize drive test MDT information;
  • the determining unit is further configured to determine the MDT information of the second user identity according to the fourth RRC message.
  • the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device or to Instruct the first user identity of the terminal device to enter the RRC inactive state.
  • the present application provides a device for establishing an RRC connection.
  • the device includes a processor, configured to implement the method described in the first aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the apparatus may further include a memory, which is coupled with the processor, and the processor is configured to implement the method described in the first aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the processor is configured to store instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions stored in the memory, the method described in the first aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof can be implemented.
  • the device may also include a communication interface for the device to communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces.
  • the present application provides a device for establishing an RRC connection.
  • the device includes a processor, configured to implement the method described in the second aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the device may further include a memory, the memory is coupled with the processor, and the processor is configured to implement the method described in the above second aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the processor is configured to store instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions stored in the memory, the method described in the second aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof can be implemented.
  • the device may also include a communication interface, and the communication interface is used for the device to communicate with other devices.
  • this application provides a system for establishing an RRC connection, the system including the device provided in the fourth aspect and the device provided in the fifth aspect; or
  • the system includes the device provided in the fifth aspect and the device provided in the sixth aspect.
  • this application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which computer instructions are stored.
  • the computer instructions When the computer instructions are run on the computer, the computer can execute the methods in the first aspect and any possible designs thereof. .
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which computer instructions are stored.
  • the computer instructions When the computer instructions are executed on the computer, the computer executes the method in the second aspect and any possible designs thereof .
  • this application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to execute the method in the first aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is coupled with the processor.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • the present application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to execute the method in the second aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is coupled with the processor.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect and any of its possible designs method.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof Methods.
  • Fig. 1 is an architecture diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of another protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of another protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting MDT information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a method for reporting a measurement configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a device for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of another apparatus for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of another apparatus for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM global system of mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE frequency division duplex FDD
  • TDD LTE Time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may refer to user equipment, access terminals, user units, user stations, mobile stations, mobile stations, remote stations, remote terminals, mobile equipment, user terminals, terminals, wireless communication equipment, user agents, or User device.
  • the terminal device can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network, or future evolution of the public land mobile network (PLMN) Terminal equipment, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may be any device with a wireless transceiver function.
  • This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WIFI) system access Point (access point, AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission point, TP) or transmission and reception point (transmission and reception point, TRP), etc., can also be the fifth generation (the fifth generation) , 5G) system, for example, the gNB or transmission point (TRP or TP) in the new radio (NR), one or a group (including multiple antenna panels) antenna panels of the base station in the 5G system, or, It may be a network node that constitutes a
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • the CU implements some of the functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and realizes the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and physical (PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU+AAU.
  • the network device may be a device including one or more of CU nodes, DU nodes, and AAU nodes.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 1 is an architecture diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system may include at least one network device 101, and the network device 101 communicates with one or more terminal devices (for example, the terminal device 102 and the terminal device 103 shown in FIG. 1).
  • the network device When a network device sends a signal, the network device is the transmitter and the terminal device is the receiver. Conversely, when a terminal device sends a signal, the terminal device is the transmitter and the network device is the receiver.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 shows that the terminal device supports dual SIM dual standby (dual SIM dual standby, DSDS).
  • DSDS dual SIM dual standby
  • two SIM cards share a single transceiver, and the two SIM cards can be in idle mode at the same time, but when one of the SIM cards receives wireless signals, the other SIM card cannot receive wireless signals.
  • the two SIM cards keep the signal monitoring of the two cards in a time-division manner. When one of the cards initiates a call, the other card cannot monitor the signal (also cannot initiate a call or be called), and the registration of the second card is maintained.
  • Figure 3 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of the present application.
  • Figure 3 shows that the terminal device supports dual SIM dual active (DSDA).
  • DSDA dual SIM dual active
  • Each SIM card has a separate transceiver and does not depend on each other.
  • the two SIM cards can be in idle mode or connected mode at the same time. model).
  • FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 may belong to the same operator or may belong to different operators, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • "user identity” (for example, the first user identity or the second user identity, etc.) is a logical concept.
  • “user identity” can correspond to SIM card or subscriber information or virtual SIM card or user identity (such as international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) or temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI), etc.) .
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
  • TMSI temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • different "user identities” logically correspond to different communication entities served by the network side.
  • a terminal device that supports two user identities can be regarded as two communication entities on the network side. Or as two UEs.
  • the network device when the "user identity" corresponds to the SIM card or subscriber information, the network device will recognize two terminal devices that support different SIM cards or different subscriber information as two different communication entities, and will also support multiple different communication entities.
  • the same terminal device with SIM card or multiple subscriber information is identified as multiple different communication entities, even in reality, the terminal device supporting multiple different SIM cards or multiple subscriber information is just one physical entity.
  • description will be made mainly by taking the "user identity" corresponding to the SIM card as an example.
  • the SIM card can be understood as the key for the terminal device to access the mobile network.
  • the SIM card and its evolution are collectively referred to as the SIM card in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the SIM card can be an identification card for a user of a global system for mobile communications (GSM) digital mobile phone, which is used to store the user's identification code and key, and supports the authentication of the user by the GSM system; and
  • the SIM card may also be a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), which may also be referred to as an upgraded SIM card.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • USB universal subscriber identity module
  • the terminal device is installed with a SIM card, which is considered to be that the terminal device supports one user identity.
  • a terminal device with two SIM cards installed can support two user identities. It can be understood that the SIM card and the user identity are one. One corresponding relationship.
  • This article mainly takes the terminal device supporting two user identities as an example.
  • the two user identities are called the first user identity and the second user identity respectively.
  • the first user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 1 is installed
  • the second user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 2 is installed.
  • the terminal device also supports more than two user identities.
  • the terminal device supports three user identities, four user identities, or more.
  • User identity can be registered in one or more networks, and each user identity can be registered in one network.
  • the embodiments of this application will mainly be described based on the terminal device supporting two user identities.
  • the specific implementation can refer to the related description of the terminal device supporting two user identities, and some simple things may be required. However, it is also within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
  • the terminal device when the user identity of the terminal device is the first user identity, from the perspective of the network device, the terminal device can be understood as a user (from the perspective of the protocol, it is a terminal device, for example, called the first user );
  • the terminal device when the user identity of the terminal device is the second user identity, from the perspective of the network device, the terminal device can be understood as another user (for example, referred to as the second user).
  • the terminal device can be registered in the first network as the first user and registered in the second network as the second user.
  • the terminal device supports one user identity, which can also be described as the terminal device having one user identity.
  • the terminal device supports two user identities, which can also be described as the terminal device having two user identities.
  • the terminal device with the first user identity can be understood as “the first user identity of the terminal device", as indicated by these two descriptions.
  • the content is the same, and the two descriptions can be interchanged.
  • the terminal device of the second user identity can be understood as “the second user identity of the terminal device”.
  • the content indicated by the two description methods is the same, and the two description methods can be interchanged.
  • the RRC connection of the two user identities must be established first, and then the established RRC connection is used to transmit data; the two user identities supported by the terminal device
  • the network device will send one or two user identity paging information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the paging information, the terminal device establishes one or two user identity RRC connections, and then uses the established RRC connection transmits data.
  • S410 The UE sends a random access preamble (preamble) to the base station according to a random access channel (RACH) resource.
  • preamble a random access preamble
  • RACH random access channel
  • the RACH resource may include a random access preamble index (a random access preamble index is used to indicate a random access preamble) and/or a mask index corresponding to the random access resource, and the mask index is used to indicate transmission Random access preamble time-frequency resources.
  • a random access preamble index is used to indicate a random access preamble
  • a mask index is used to indicate transmission Random access preamble time-frequency resources.
  • the base station sends a random access response (RAR) to the UE.
  • RAR random access response
  • the RAR carries uplink authorization information, a temporary cell radio network temporary identifier (T-CRNTI), and a timing advance (T-CRNTI). At least one of TA).
  • the uplink authorization information is used to indicate the resources for sending the RRC connection establishment request.
  • the uplink authorization information includes the frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and modulation and coding scheme (MCS) used by the UE to send the RRC connection establishment request.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • TA is used for UE to learn uplink timing.
  • the UE sends an RRC connection establishment request (RRC connection request or RRC set up request) message to the base station on the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information.
  • RRC connection establishment request RRC connection request or RRC set up request
  • the RRC connection establishment request is transmitted through signaling radio bearer 0 (SRB0).
  • SRB0 uses a common control channel (CCCH) logical channel to transmit RRC messages.
  • CCCH common control channel
  • the base station After receiving the RRC connection establishment request, the base station sends an RRC connection setup (RRC connection setup or RRC setup) message to the UE, where the RRC connection setup message includes the configuration information of the UE.
  • RRC connection setup RRC connection setup or RRC setup
  • the configuration information includes protocol stack parameters corresponding to Signaling Radio Bearer 1 (Signalling Radio Bearer 1, SRB1), and the configuration information is used to exchange subsequent RRC messages between the UE and the base station.
  • the RRC connection establishment message is used to establish SRB1.
  • SRB1 uses a dedicated control channel (dedicated control channel, DCCH) to transmit RRC messages.
  • the protocol stack parameters include at least one of packet data convergence protocol control (PDCP) layer parameters, RLC layer parameters, MAC layer parameters, and PHY layer parameters.
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol control
  • the base station may first send a contention conflict resolution identification information to the UE.
  • This information carries the bit information of the RRC establishment request message sent by the UE before (for example, the RRC establishment request message sent before exceeds 48 bits, and the contention conflict resolution identification information only carries the first 48 bits, or the RRC connection sent before.
  • the request message does not exceed 48 bits, then the contention conflict resolution identification information carries all the RRC establishment request messages), so that after receiving the information, the UE can compare with the information of the RRC establishment request message sent by itself before, if the contention conflict resolution flag is If the information belongs to the content of the RRC establishment request message sent by itself, it is considered that the base station has received the RRC establishment request message of the UE, and the random access process is successfully completed.
  • RRC connection setup complete RRC connection setup complete
  • the RRC connection establishment complete message may include a non-access stratum (non-access, NAS) message, and the base station transparently transmits the NAS message to the core network.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • the main purpose of the RRC connection establishment process is to establish SRB1 and send the NAS message on the UE side to the network side.
  • the base station can configure the configuration information corresponding to the data radio bearer (DRB) for the UE according to the service requirements of the UE.
  • DRB is used to define the processing strategy of data packets in the wireless interface Uu.
  • DRB is used to transmit data packets.
  • the configuration information corresponding to the DRB includes protocol stack parameters corresponding to the DRB.
  • the protocol stack parameters corresponding to DRB include service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer parameters, packet data convergence protocol control (PDCP) layer parameters, RLC layer parameters, MAC layer parameters, and PHY layer parameters. At least one of the parameters.
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol control
  • security activation of the access layer will be performed between the base station and the UE, that is, an interactive security mode command process.
  • the base station sends a safety mode command message to the UE, and the UE sends a safety mode complete message to the base station.
  • the security mode command message carries an encryption algorithm and an integrity protection algorithm.
  • the UE derives the key K gNB or K eNB .
  • the UE then derives the security key for integrity protection of RRC signaling based on the key K gNB or K eNB , the security key for encryption of RRC signaling, the security key for integrity protection of user data, and the encryption of user data.
  • the specific derivation algorithm can refer to the protocol 3GPP 33.501 or 33.401.
  • Case 1 RRC Connection Re-establishment procedure, so that the UE reestablishes the wireless connection after the radio link failure. Or the UE initiates an RRC Resume procedure from the RRC_INACTIVE state, so that the UE sends some information to the base station (for example, data transmission when the UE enters the RRC_CONNECTED state).
  • the two scenarios are similar to the process of the UE establishing RRC in the RRC_IDLE state.
  • the UE sends a random access preamble and receives a random access response sent by the base station.
  • the uplink grant information carried in the random access response indicates that the UE sends an RRC reestablishment request (RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest or RRCReestablishmentRequest) message or an RRC recovery request (RRCConnectionResumeRequest or RRCResumeRequest) message Resources.
  • the UE sends an RRC reestablishment request or an RRC resume request message and receives an RRC reestablishment message (RRCConnectionReestablishment or RRCReestablishment) or an RRC resume message (RRCConnectionResume or RRCResume) sent by the base station.
  • the UE sends an RRC reestablishment complete message (RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete or RRCReestablishmentComplete) or an RRC reestablishment complete message (RRCConnectionResumeComplete or RRCResumeComplete). These procedures are for the UE to establish SRB or/and DRB.
  • the second situation is a handover process. After the handover, the UE needs to establish uplink synchronization with a new cell.
  • Case 4 In the RRC connection state, when the uplink data arrives (for example, it needs to report a measurement report or send user data), and the UE needs to report a buffer status report (buffer status report, BSR), if there is no uplink resource available for uplink data transmission Or when the uplink resources currently available for uplink data transmission are not satisfied, a scheduling request (scheduling request, SR) is triggered. SR is used to request uplink resources. If there is no PUCCH resource available for the scheduling request in the uplink, the UE initiates a random access procedure to request the base station to schedule the UE for uplink data.
  • buffer status report buffer status report
  • SR scheduling request
  • Case 5 In the RRC connected state, the UE performs beam management. When the UE detects that the beam signal quality is below a certain threshold, the UE will select other beams for random access and notify the base station to change the corresponding beam.
  • the above S410 and S420 need to be performed, and then the UE sends a cell radio network temporary identification (cell Radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) MAC control element. After that, if the UE receives the PDCCH scrambled with the C-RNTI, it is considered that the current random access procedure is successful.
  • C-RNTI Cell Radio network temporary identifier
  • the base station will carry the parameter for updating the key in the RRC reconstruction message.
  • the random access process mentioned above is generally called a 4-step random access process.
  • a 2-step random access procedure is also proposed.
  • the 2-step random access process means that after the UE sends the random access preamble, it does not need to wait for the base station to send the random access response before sending the RRC connection establishment request message or the RRC reestablishment request message or the RRC recovery request message or carrying C-
  • the MAC control element of RNTI that is, the above information can be sent before the random access response is received), and then the base station will send response information to the UE.
  • the response information can indicate that the UE has succeeded in random access or that the UE has returned to normal Random access (that is, the UE directly sends an RRC connection establishment request message or an RRC reestablishment request message or an RRC recovery request message or a MAC control element carrying C-RNTI) or instructs the UE to postpone a period of time before performing 2-step random access.
  • the terminal device supports multiple user identities (it can also be understood that the terminal device supports multiple SIMs).
  • the terminal device needs to initiate competitive or non-competitive random access during the establishment of an RRC connection.
  • competing random access due to limited resources, the terminal Devices need to compete for resources for multiple user identities, which will increase the delay of random access, and even cause random access failures, resulting in a decrease in transmission performance; for non-competitive random access, multiple user identities are required for terminal equipment Occupying more random access resources will increase the resource overhead of random access.
  • the process of random access will also increase the delay in establishing the RRC connection.
  • the terminal device needs to compete for random access resources (such as RACH resources) for two user identities (both user identities are in the RRC_IDLE state), which results in high signaling overhead and delay Longer.
  • random access resources such as RACH resources
  • the terminal device needs to preempt RACH resources for two user identities and use the RACH resource to send the preamble.
  • the terminal device cannot preempt resources for a certain user identity, resulting in random access failure; Or a user identity of the terminal device and user identities of other terminal devices may use the same RACH resource for access, so the base station cannot distinguish which user identities need to be accessed, which may cause the base station to fail to detect the random access preamble, so the same The two user identities of the RACH resource need to re-send the random access preamble, which leads to an increase in the random access delay. Or the base station detects the same random access preamble on the same RACH resource, but the base station will only send one random access response, so that both user identities will send the RRC establishment request message according to the uplink authorization information in the random access response.
  • the base station will only send the contention conflict resolution identification information to one user identity (that is, carry the bit information of the RRC establishment request message sent by one user identity), and the other user identity will consider that the conflict resolution has failed, and then resend random access. Preamble, so that the access delay of the user identity will increase.
  • FIG. 5 shows a method 500 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 500 includes:
  • the network device obtains configuration information, and the configuration information is used to assist the terminal device in establishing an RRC connection as the second user.
  • the network device can generate configuration information for the second user identity of the terminal device,
  • the network device can also obtain configuration information from other network devices.
  • the configuration information is obtained from other network devices through the Xn or X2 interface between the network devices.
  • the network device corresponding to the first user identity sends a request message to the network device corresponding to the second user identity, and then the network device corresponding to the second user identity sends the configuration information to the network device corresponding to the first user identity.
  • the first user identity and the second user identity can belong to the same CU but belong to different DUs.
  • the network device can be a CU.
  • the protocol stack parameter is wireless At least one of radio link control (RLC) layer parameters, media access control (MAC) layer parameters, or physical (PHY) layer parameters, due to the RLC layer parameters of the second user identity
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • the DU of the second user identity returns to the CU at least one parameter of the RLC layer parameter, the MAC layer parameter, and the PHY layer parameter of the second user identity.
  • the CU may send the request message to the DU of the second user identity through a non-UE-level interface.
  • the request message may be an F1 interface establishment message, and the F1 interface establishment message is for the user to establish an F1 interface between the CU and the DU of the second user identity.
  • the DU is requested to allocate the corresponding configuration information through the F1 interface message corresponding to the first user identity between the CU and the DU (optionally, the interface message also includes It carries the cell identifier, which is used to indicate which cell in the DU is requested to allocate the corresponding configuration information).
  • the first user identity and the second user identity may have the same service network element or different service network elements.
  • the network device in S510 may be a base station.
  • the base station may be a serving base station sharing the first user identity and the second user identity, the base station may also be a serving base station of the first user identity, and the base station may obtain configuration information of the second user identity from the serving base station of the second user identity.
  • S520 The network device sends a first RRC message of the first user identity to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the network device, where the first RRC message includes configuration information.
  • the first RRC message may be an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration (RRC reconfiguration) message.
  • the RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to release the RRC connection of the first user identity, and accordingly, the network device can release the service data connection and the RRC connection of the first user identity.
  • the RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to suspend the RRC connection of the first user identity or to indicate that the service data connection of the first user identity of the terminal device enters an inactive state. Accordingly, the network device can suspend the first user identity.
  • the service data connection and RRC connection of the user identity is used to indicate that the terminal device can maintain the service data connection and the RRC connection of the first user identity, and accordingly, the network device can maintain the service data connection and the RRC connection of the first user identity.
  • the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity. Only when the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, can it send the configuration information for assisting the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity through the first RRC message of the first user identity .
  • the network device may determine that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity through at least one of the following methods:
  • the network device receives the paging information of the terminal device paging the second user identity from the core network device.
  • the paging information carries the interface identity of the first user identity.
  • the interface identity includes that the first user identity is on the NG port.
  • the control plane interface identification of the S1 port is the interface between the base station and the 5G core network 5GC
  • the S1 is the interface between the base station and the 4G core network EPC.
  • the network device may determine that the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity according to the interface identity of the first user identity carried in the paging information of the terminal device paging the second user identity.
  • Manner 2 The network device receives a message (for example, an NG port message or an S1 port message) sent by the core network device through the interface of the first user identity and carries the paging information for paging the terminal device of the second user identity, and the network device It may be determined that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity at the same time according to the message sent through the interface of the first user identity that carries the terminal device that pages the second user identity.
  • a message for example, an NG port message or an S1 port message
  • the terminal device may actively send to the network device indication information indicating that the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity, and the network device may determine that the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may also carry the identity of the cell corresponding to the second user identity (physical cell identity or global cell identity).
  • the network device sends paging information for paging the second user identity to the terminal device, and after the terminal device receives the paging information for paging the second user identity, the terminal device actively sends indication information to the network device.
  • the terminal device actively initiates the establishment of the RRC connection with the second user identity, the terminal device actively sends the indication information to the network device.
  • S530 The terminal device uses the identity of the second user to establish an RRC connection according to the configuration information.
  • S530 can be understood in at least one of the following ways:
  • the establishment of an RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user based on the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device inherits the RRC connection established by the first user as the second user according to the configuration information, and the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device to
  • the second user identity uses the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, so that the terminal device does not need to initiate random access as the second user identity, nor does it need to send the RRC establishment request message as the second user identity to establish the RRC connection. In this way, the signaling overhead caused by the terminal device needing to perform steps S410-S450 in FIG. 4 for the second user identity can be avoided, and the random access delay for the terminal device to initiate the second user identity can also be reduced.
  • the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the terminal device as the second user.
  • the RRC connection established as the first user may specifically be: the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the first user of the terminal device as the second user. At least one of the SRB1, SRB2, and key of the identity.
  • the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the second user identity.
  • the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters (such as the protocol stack parameters of SRB1) and/or the key information of the second user identity (the key information may include the key of the second user identity (for example, the network device can be based on the first user identity).
  • the key derives the key of the second user identity), or the information used to generate the second user identity key), the terminal device can be based on the current wireless configuration information of the first user identity, and then according to the second user
  • the wireless configuration information of the identity is modified to obtain the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the second user identity (for example, the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
  • the RRC connection of the first user identity is used by the second user identity of the terminal device, the RRC connection can no longer be used by the first user identity of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the second user identity according to the configuration information.
  • the terminal device uses the configuration information to initiate random access with the second user identity, and the configuration information may include random access channels (random access). channel, RACH) resources.
  • RACH random access channels
  • the terminal device does not need to use competing random access resources for random access in a competitive manner as the second user, but directly uses random access channel resources included in the configuration information to perform random access in a non-competitive manner, which can improve random access.
  • the success rate can also reduce the delay of random access.
  • the RACH resource may include a random access preamble index (the random access preamble index is used to indicate the random access preamble) and/or the mask index corresponding to the random access resource, and the mask index is used to indicate the sending of the random access preamble.
  • a random access preamble index (the random access preamble index is used to indicate the random access preamble) and/or the mask index corresponding to the random access resource, and the mask index is used to indicate the sending of the random access preamble.
  • Time-frequency resources the random access preamble index is used to indicate the random access preamble.
  • the random access of the second user identity may be to establish an RRC connection, and an RRC connection may be established for the first time in an idle state, or an RRC connection may be established during an RRC reestablishment process, or an RRC connection may be established during an RRC recovery process.
  • the second user identity can use the random access channel resource to perform 4-step random access or perform 2-step random access.
  • the configuration information may also carry the uplink authorization information for establishing the RRC connection with the second user identity.
  • the uplink grant information is used to indicate the resource for sending the RRC setup request message or the RRC reestablishment request message or the RRC recovery request message or the MAC control element carrying the C-RNTI.
  • the uplink authorization information includes the uplink scheduling interval of the second user identity, the uplink starting subframe number of the second user identity, and the uplink authorization of the second user identity.
  • the uplink authorization includes information such as frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and MCS used to send uplink information.
  • the establishment of an RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device uses the configuration information to establish the RRC connection as the second user identity.
  • the configuration information may include At least one of the uplink authorization information for establishing the RRC connection with the user identity and the identity of the second user in the cell where the terminal device establishes the RRC connection with the second user identity (for example, the cell radio network temporary identity C-RNTI)
  • the uplink grant information is used to indicate the resource for sending the RRC establishment request message or the RRC reconstruction request message or the RRC recovery request message.
  • the terminal device needs to send the random access preamble as the second user identity, and needs to obtain the uplink authorization information of the second user identity and the delay caused by the C-RNTI in the random access response sent by the network device. And overhead.
  • the terminal device needs to perform steps S410-S420 for the second user identity.
  • the terminal device directly sends the second user identity RRC connection establishment request to the network device on the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information.
  • the second user identity can use the identity of the second user identity to communicate with the network side.
  • the uplink authorization information includes the uplink scheduling interval of the second user identity, the uplink starting subframe number of the second user identity, and the uplink authorization of the second user identity.
  • the uplink authorization includes information such as frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and MCS used to send uplink information.
  • the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user identity, which can be understood as: the terminal device uses the first user identity and the second user identity at the same time the terminal device uses the RRC connection established as the first user identity, then the terminal device does not Random access is initiated as the second user, and there is no need to establish an RRC connection as the second user.
  • This can avoid the delay and overhead caused by the terminal device needing to initiate the RRC connection as the second user.
  • the signaling overhead caused by the terminal device needing to perform steps S410-S450 in FIG. 4 for the second user identity can be avoided, and the random access delay for the terminal device to initiate the second user identity can also be reduced.
  • the RRC connection established by the first user identity can continue to be used by the first user identity of the terminal device, which can improve the utilization rate of the RRC connection of the first user identity.
  • the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the second user identity.
  • the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters and/or key information of the second user identity (the key information may include the key of the second user identity (for example, the network device can derive the second user identity from the key of the first user identity) Key), or information used to generate the key of the second user identity), the terminal device can be based on the current wireless configuration information of the first user identity, and then according to the second user identity included in the configuration information
  • the wireless configuration information is modified to obtain the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the second user identity (for example, the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
  • the configuration information may also include the configuration information of the DRB of the second user identity, and the terminal device may use the second user identity to perform user data transmission of the second user identity according to the configuration information of the DRB.
  • the first user identity and the second user identity may have different RRC layers, and the different RRC layers may serve terminal devices with different user identities at the same time.
  • the terminal device if the terminal device uses the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity at the same time as the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device retains the protocol stack parameters of the first user identity and the first user identity at the same time. Two protocol stack parameters of the user identity, and/or, the terminal device can retain the key of the first user identity and the key of the second user identity at the same time.
  • the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device uses the first user identity and the second user identity in a time-division multiplexing manner to establish the RRC connection as the first user identity RRC connection.
  • This can avoid the time delay and overhead caused by the terminal device needing to initiate the RRC connection as the second user.
  • it can avoid the terminal device needing to perform steps S410-S450 in FIG. 4 again for the second user identity.
  • the resulting signaling overhead can also reduce the random access delay for the terminal device to initiate the second user identity.
  • the RRC connection established by the first user identity can continue to be used by the first user identity of the terminal device, which can improve the utilization rate of the RRC connection of the first user identity.
  • the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the second user identity.
  • the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters and/or key information of the second user identity.
  • the terminal device can modify the wireless configuration information of the second user identity on the basis of the current wireless configuration information of the first user identity, In this way, the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the second user identity (such as the protocol stack parameters of SRB1) are obtained.
  • the first user identity and the second user identity can have the same RRC layer (RRC entity), and the same RRC layer can serve terminal devices with different user identities at different times, and only Can serve a user identity. That is, the first user identity and the second user identity use the RRC layer in a time division manner.
  • RRC entity RRC layer
  • the same RRC layer can serve terminal devices with different user identities at different times, and only Can serve a user identity. That is, the first user identity and the second user identity use the RRC layer in a time division manner.
  • the terminal device as the first user identity can only be used by the second user identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device can use the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the second user identity
  • the terminal device as the first user identity can continue to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the first user identity; or, in e), at a certain moment
  • the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity can only be used by the second user identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device can modify the key of the first user identity to the key of the second user identity.
  • the terminal The device as the first user identity can continue to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, and the terminal device can modify the key of the second user identity to the key of the first user identity.
  • the first user identity and the second user identity may have different RRC layers (RRC entities), and RRC entities corresponding to different user identities may be used to serve the terminal device at different times.
  • RRC entities RRC entities
  • the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity can only be used by the second user identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device uses the RRC entity of the second user identity to provide services for the second user identity.
  • the terminal device as the first user identity can continue to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the RRC entity of the first user identity to provide services for the first user identity.
  • the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user at a certain moment can only be used by the second user identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device can use the key of the second user identity.
  • the terminal device uses the first user identity.
  • the user identity can continue to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, and the terminal device can use the key of the first user identity.
  • the configuration information may also include configuration information of the DRB of the second user identity, and the second user identity may use the second user identity to perform user data transmission corresponding to the second user identity according to the configuration information of the DRB.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the first RRC message, it is possible that the first RRC message includes information about the identity of the first user, or it may include information about the identity of the second user in the first RRC message, or It is possible that the first RRC message includes the identity information of the first user and the identity information of the second user.
  • the terminal device needs to determine whether the RRC connection of the first user identity can be used by the second user identity. In other words, the terminal device needs to determine whether the second user identity information is included in the first RRC message.
  • the information may be the aforementioned configuration information. Whether the RRC connection of the first user identity can be used by the second user identity can be determined by at least one of the following methods.
  • Manner 1 If the first RRC message includes the second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes configuration information, the terminal device can determine that the terminal device can use the first RRC message according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message. Second, the user identity uses the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity. That is, in the first way, the RRC connection established as the first user using the terminal device as the second user can be determined through the nesting of RRC messages.
  • the first RRC message includes other information of the first user identity in addition to the second RRC message, the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity. That is, the first RRC message carries information about the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user at the same time.
  • the first RRC message includes other information of the first user identity in addition to the second RRC message
  • the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device are shared.
  • the two user identities can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user at the same time; if the first RRC message does not include any other information of the first user identity except the second RRC message, the first RRC message is the second In the RRC message of the user identity, the terminal device uses the RRC connection established with the first user identity by the terminal device as the second user identity.
  • the network device may send indication information for using the RRC connection to the terminal device, and the specific indication information for using the RRC connection is used to indicate: if the first RRC message includes the first user identity in addition to the second RRC message For other information, the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity at the same time; If an RRC message does not include any other information about the identity of the first user except the second RRC message, the first RRC message is an RRC message with the identity of the second user, and the terminal device uses the terminal device as the second user as the first user.
  • the RRC connection established by the identity If an RRC message does not include any other information about the identity of the first user except the second RRC message, the first RRC message is an RRC message with the identity of the second user, and the terminal device uses the terminal device as the second user as the first user.
  • the RRC connection established by the identity is
  • the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used for the terminal device to establish as the second user identity RRC connection, so that the terminal device can determine, according to the first indication information included in the first RRC message, that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user as the second user. That is, in the second manner, an explicit indication in the first RRC message can be used to determine the RRC connection established as the first user using the terminal device as the second user.
  • the radio bearer configuration in the first RRC message may carry the first indication information.
  • the first RRC message includes other information of the first user identity in addition to the first indication information and configuration information
  • the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity
  • the terminal The first user identity and the second user identity of the device can simultaneously use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity; if the first RRC message does not include any information about the first user identity except for the first indication information and configuration information
  • the first RRC message is an RRC message of the second user identity, and the terminal device uses the RRC connection established with the first user identity by the terminal device as the second user identity.
  • the network device may send indication information for using the RRC connection to the terminal device.
  • the specific indication information for using the RRC connection is used to indicate: if the first RRC message includes the first indication information and configuration information, it also includes the first indication information and configuration information.
  • the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity at the same time ; If the first RRC message does not include any other information about the identity of the first user except for the first indication information and configuration information, the first RRC message is an RRC message with the identity of the second user, and the terminal device uses the identity of the second user The RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
  • Manner 3 The cell where the configuration information of the different user identities of the terminal device is located is in different positions of the first RRC message, and the terminal equipment can determine whether the cell where the configuration information of the second user identity is located is present.
  • the middle terminal device may use the RRC connection established by the terminal device in the identity of the first user as the second user.
  • the protocol may stipulate that the information elements in which the network equipment configures the configuration information of different user identities of the terminal equipment are located in different positions of the first RRC message.
  • the information element where the configuration information is located at position 1 of the RRC message indicates that the configuration information is the first user identity of the terminal device
  • the information element where the configuration information is located at position 2 of the RRC message indicates that the configuration information is that of the terminal device.
  • the identity of the second user is the information element where the configuration information is located at position 1 of the RRC message.
  • the terminal device receives the first RRC message, and the cell containing the configuration information in the first RRC message is in position 2 of the first RRC message, and the terminal device can determine that the configuration information is the identity of the second user, so that the terminal device can determine Use the terminal device as the second user to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the first user; or the terminal device receives the first RRC message, and the first RRC message has configuration information in position 1 and configuration information in position 2, and the terminal device can determine
  • the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the terminal device can use the first user identity and the second user identity to jointly use the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity.
  • the first RRC message may include the non-access stratum (non-access, NAS) message of the first user identity, and may also include the first user identity
  • the NAS message and the NAS message of the second user identity may also include the NAS message of the second user identity. If the first RRC message includes a NAS message, the terminal device needs to determine that the NAS message is the NAS message of the first user identity It is also the NAS message of the second user identity. It may be determined whether the NAS message included in the first RRC message belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity through at least one of the following methods.
  • Manner 1 If the first RRC message includes the fifth RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the fifth RRC message includes the NAS message, the terminal device can determine that the NAS message is the first RRC message according to the fifth RRC message included in the first RRC message. 2. NAS message of user identity. That is to say, in mode one, the user identity of the NAS message can be determined through the nesting of the RRC message.
  • the terminal device determines that the NAS message is the second user identity according to the fifth RRC message, it can also be considered that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity as the second user identity.
  • the fifth RRC message may be the aforementioned second RRC message, that is, the first RRC message of the first user identity includes a second RRC message, and the second RRC message includes configuration information and a NAS message.
  • the terminal device may determine the If the configuration information and the NAS message are the identity of the second user, it can also be understood that the terminal device can use the identity of the second user to use the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the first user.
  • the first RRC message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the NAS message included in the first RRC message is a NAS message with a second user identity, so that the terminal device can follow the first
  • the second indication information included in the RRC message determines that the NAS message is the second user identity. That is, in the second mode, it can be determined whether the NAS message belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity through an explicit indication in the first RRC message.
  • the terminal device determines that the NAS message is the second user identity according to the second indication information, it can also be considered that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity as the second user identity.
  • the first RRC message may include a NAS message, configuration information, first indication information, and second indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information is the identity of the second user
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the NAS If the message is the second user identity, the terminal device can determine that the NAS message and configuration information are both the second user identity according to the first indication information and the second indication information, and it can also be understood that the terminal device can use the terminal as the second user identity
  • Manner 3 The cell of the NAS message with different user identities of the terminal device is located at a different position of the first RRC message, and the terminal device determines that the NAS message is based on the position of the cell containing the NAS message in the first RRC message The identity of the first user is still the identity of the second user.
  • the protocol may stipulate that the network device configures the cell in which the NAS message of different user identities of the terminal device is located in different positions of the first RRC message.
  • the cell where the NAS message is located at position 3 of the RRC message indicates that the NAS message is the first user identity of the terminal device, and the cell where the NAS message is located is at position 4 of the RRC message, which indicates that the NAS message is for the terminal device.
  • the identity of the second user the terminal device receives the first RRC message, and the cell where the NAS message in the first RRC message is located is at position 4 of the first RRC message, and the terminal device can determine that the NAS message is of the second user identity; or the terminal device receives the first RRC message.
  • the location 3 of the first RRC message has a NAS message
  • the location 4 also has a NAS message
  • the terminal device can determine that the NAS message of location 3 is the identity of the first user, and the NAS message of location 4 is the identity of the second user.
  • the terminal device determines that the NAS message is the second user identity according to the cell where the NAS message is located, it can also be considered that the terminal device can use the terminal device as the second user identity to establish the RRC connection with the first user identity.
  • position 1 of the first RRC message includes configuration information
  • position 3 includes a NAS message.
  • the terminal device can determine that the configuration information of position 1 and the NAS message of position 3 are the identity of the second user, or It is understood that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user as the second user.
  • the first RRC message includes the second RRC message of the second user identity, the NAS message, and the second indication information
  • the second RRC message includes configuration information
  • the terminal device determines that the NAS message is second according to the second indication information.
  • the terminal device may determine that the configuration information is the second user identity according to the second RRC message.
  • the first RRC message includes configuration information, a NAS message, and second indication information.
  • the cell where the configuration information is located is at the position of the first RRC message 2.
  • the terminal device determines that the NAS message is the second user according to the second indication information. For the identity, the terminal device may determine that the configuration information is also the identity of the second user according to the location of the cell where the configuration information is located.
  • the first RRC message includes the fifth RRC message, configuration information, and first indication information.
  • the fifth RRC message includes the NAS message. If the terminal device can determine that the configuration information is the second user identity according to the first indication information, the terminal device may It is determined according to the fifth RRC message that the NAS message is the identity of the second user.
  • the first RRC message includes the first indication information, the second indication information, the configuration information, and the NAS message. If the terminal device can determine that the configuration information is the second user identity according to the first indication information, the terminal device can according to the second indication information It is determined that the NAS message is the identity of the second user.
  • the terminal device determines that the configuration information and/or the NAS message included in the first RRC message is the second user identity, it can be understood that the terminal device can use the terminal device to establish the identity of the first user as the second user. RRC connection.
  • the first RRC message may also include the configuration information of the first user identity and/or Or NAS message
  • the configuration information of the first user identity and/or the NAS message is similar to the configuration information and/or NAS message of the second user identity
  • the first RRC message includes first indication information, third indication information, and configuration information 1 and configuration information 2.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information 1 is the identity of the second user
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information 2 is the identity of the first user. In order to avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the first RRC message may include a correspondence
  • the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate that different logical channels of the same bearer correspond to different user identities, or
  • the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate different bandwidths.
  • Part of the BWP corresponds to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used by the terminal device to determine the first user identity or the second user identity. user ID.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device subsequently receives the data packet (the data packet includes the RRC message transmitted via SRB and/or the data transmitted via DRB), since the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device needs It is determined whether the data packet belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity. For example, the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that bearer 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and bearer identity 2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the bearer corresponding to the data packet received by the terminal device is bearer 1 (for example, the logical channel identity carried by the MAC layer knows this The data packet corresponds to bearer 1), then the data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device with the first user identity.
  • bearer 1 for example, the logical channel identity carried by the MAC layer knows this The data packet corresponds to bearer 1
  • the terminal device receives the data packet as bearer 2 (for example, the data is learned through the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer)
  • the packet corresponds to bearer 2)
  • the data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the bearer identifiers of the data packets of the two user identities of the terminal device may be the same, and the corresponding relationship may indicate that the logical channel 1 of bearer 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and the logical channel 2 of bearer 1 corresponds to the second user identity.
  • the bearer of the received data packet is bearer 1 and the logical channel of bearer 1 is logical channel 1 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer knows that the data packet corresponds to logical channel 1), then the data packet is sent by the network device to the first A terminal device with a user identity; if the bearer of the data packet received by the terminal device is bearer 1 and the logical channel of bearer 1 is logical channel 2 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer knows that the data packet corresponds to logical channel 2) , The data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the correspondence relationship may indicate that key 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and key 2 corresponds to the second user identity.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the data packet, the terminal device tries to use the key 1 and key 2 to decrypt the data packet. If the device can correctly decode the data packet using key 1, the data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the first user identity; if the terminal device can correctly decode the data packet using key 2, the data packet is sent by the network device To the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the correspondence relationship may indicate that C-RNTI1 corresponds to the first user identity, and C-RNTI2 corresponds to the second user identity.
  • the scheduling data indicated in the PDCCH is the first user identity, that is, the data carried in the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) indicated in the PDCCH is The identity of the first user.
  • the scheduling data indicated in the PDCCH is the second user identity Yes, that is, the data carried in the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) indicated in the PDCCH is the identity of the second user.
  • the correspondence relationship may indicate that the bandwidth part (BWP) 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and BWP2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the terminal device receives a data packet from BWP1, the terminal device can determine that the data packet is sent by the network device. For the terminal device of the first user identity, if the terminal device receives a data packet from the BWP2, the terminal device can determine that the data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the correspondence relationship may indicate that subcarrier interval 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and subcarrier interval 2 corresponds to the second user identity.
  • the terminal device can determine the The data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the first user. If the terminal device receives the data packet from the physical channel corresponding to the subcarrier interval 2, the terminal device can determine that the data packet is sent by the network device to the second user The identity of the terminal equipment.
  • the network device needs to determine whether the data packet belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity. For example, the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that the bearer 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and the bearer identity 2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the bearer corresponding to the data packet received by the network device is bearer 1 (for example, the logical channel identity carried by the MAC layer knows this The data packet corresponds to bearer 1), then the data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the first user.
  • bearer 1 for example, the logical channel identity carried by the MAC layer knows this The data packet corresponds to bearer 1
  • the bearer of the data packet received by the network device is bearer 2 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer knows the data packet The data packet corresponds to bearer 2), and the data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the second user.
  • the bearer identifiers of the data packets of the two user identities of the terminal device may be the same, and the corresponding relationship may indicate that the logical channel 1 of bearer 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and the logical channel 2 of bearer 1 corresponds to the second user identity.
  • the bearer of the received data packet is bearer 1 and the logical channel of bearer 1 is logical channel 1 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer knows that the data packet corresponds to logical channel 1), then the data packet is a terminal device.
  • a user identity is sent to the network device; if the bearer of the data packet received by the network device is bearer 1 and the logical channel of the bearer 1 is logical channel 2 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer is used to learn the logical channel corresponding to the data packet 2), the data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the second user.
  • the corresponding relationship may indicate that key 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and key 2 corresponds to the second user identity.
  • the network device After the network device receives the data packet, the network device tries to use the key 1 and key 2 to decrypt the data packet.
  • the device can correctly decode the data packet using key 1, then the data packet is sent to the network device as the first user by the terminal device; if the network device can correctly decode the data packet using key 2, the data packet is a terminal device It is sent to the network device as the second user.
  • the correspondence relationship may indicate that C-RNTI1 corresponds to the first user identity, and C-RNTI2 corresponds to the second user identity.
  • the scheduling data indicated in the PDCCH It is the identity of the first user, for example, the data carried in the PUSCH indicated in the PDCCH is the identity of the first user.
  • the scheduling data indicated in the PDCCH is the second user identity, for example, the data carried in the PYSCH indicated in the PDCCH is the second user identity of.
  • the correspondence relationship may indicate that BWP1 corresponds to the first user identity, and BWP2 corresponds to the second user identity.
  • the network device may determine that the data packet is a terminal device and sent to the network as the first user. For the device, if the network device receives a data packet from BWP2, the network device can determine that the data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the second user. For another example, the correspondence relationship may indicate that subcarrier interval 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and subcarrier interval 2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the network device receives a data packet from the physical channel corresponding to subcarrier interval 1, the network device can determine the The data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the first user. If the network device receives the data packet from the physical channel corresponding to the subcarrier interval 2, the network device can determine that the data packet is the terminal device as the second user. Sent to the network device.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device receives the first RRC message, the terminal device needs to feed back an eighth RRC message to the network device, and the eighth RRC message carries the RRC response information and/or the NAS message.
  • the network device also needs to distinguish the RRC response information and/or NAS message of the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the specific method can be the same as the above method one (that is, the eighth RRC message sent by the terminal device as the first user to the network device carries the RRC message of the second user identity), and the second method (that is, the terminal device sends the RRC message to the network device as the first user).
  • the eighth RRC message sent by the device carries indication information, indicating which user identity the corresponding RRC response information and/or NAS message belongs to), mode three (the RRC response information and/or NAS messages of different user identities are in the eighth RRC Different positions of the message).
  • the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user.
  • the RRC information and NAS message interaction between the terminal equipment and the network equipment can also be determined according to the above method 1, method 2, and method 3. Which user identity the RRC information and NAS information belong to.
  • the network device when the network device is paging the terminal device of the second user identity, the network device may send a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device receives it as the first user identity.
  • the third RRC message sent by the network device includes the first paging information used to page the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the first paging information may carry the identity of the second user identity.
  • the network device may page the second user identity
  • the paging information of the terminal device is carried in the third RRC message of the first user identity, so as to prevent the network device from being unable to page the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the third RRC message may be the aforementioned first RRC message, that is, the third RRC message and the first RRC message are the same RRC message; or the third RRC message is different from the aforementioned first RRC message,
  • the third RRC message may be sent by the network device to the terminal device before sending the first RRC message to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device has not established the RRC connection of the second user identity or has not completed the random access process of the second user identity, the terminal device cannot report the record type of the second user identity to the network device.
  • Minimize drive test minimization of drive test, MDT
  • MDT minimization of drive test
  • the terminal device can send the fourth RRC message to the network device as the first user.
  • the RRC message includes the logged MDT information or radio link failure information or access failure information of the second user identity of the terminal device (different information can be carried in different cell positions), so that logging of the second user identity can be avoided MDT information or wireless link failure information or access failure information is out of date and invalid or deleted.
  • the terminal device before the terminal device sends the fourth RRC message, the terminal device first sends a sixth RRC message to the network device as the first user, which carries sixth indication information, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device has a second RRC message.
  • the logged MDT or wireless link failure information or access failure information of the user identity (different information can correspond to different indication information).
  • the network device may send a logged MDT request message or a radio link failure request message or an access failure request message, a logged MDT request message or a radio link to the first user identity of the terminal device
  • the path failure request message or the access failure request message is used to instruct the terminal device to report the logged MDT or wireless link failure information or access failure information of the second user identity (different information can correspond to different indication information), and the terminal device can report according to
  • the sixth indication information sends a fourth RRC message to the network device as the first user identity, and the fourth RRC message includes logged MDT information or radio link failure information or access failure information of the second user identity of the terminal device.
  • the network device may configure logged MDT measurement for both the first user identity and the second user identity. It is possible that one user identity is in the RRC_CONNECTE state, and the other user identity is in the IDLE or RRC_INACTIVE state, and logged MDT only records For the signal quality recorded under idle and RRC_INACTIVE, in order to obtain more MDT measurement results, the measurement result of the cell obtained by one user identity can also be used as the measurement result of another user identity. Further, the terminal device may also only record a piece of logged MDT measurement results, and when a certain user identity needs to report the logged MDT measurement, the corresponding recorded measurement result is reported to the network device.
  • the service network device of the terminal device needs to change due to changes in the location of the terminal device or network congestion, that is, the terminal device
  • the source network device needs to send the first information, the second information, and the fourth instruction information to the target network device.
  • the fourth instruction information is used to indicate that the first information is the first information.
  • the second information is the second user identity
  • the target network device may determine, according to the fourth indication information, that the first information is the first user identity and the second information is the second user identity.
  • the source network device may carry the first information, the second information, and the fourth indication information in the same message and send it to the target network device.
  • the first information may be the context of the first user identity, and the second information may be the context of the second user identity; for another example, the first information may be the first user identity protocol data unit (PDU) session resource establishment Request, the second information is a request for establishing a PDU session with the second user identity; for another example, the first information is a PDU session with the first user identity, and the second information is a PDU session with the second user identity; for another example, the first information is The data radio bearer (DRB) of the first user identity, and the second information is the DRB of the second user identity.
  • DRB data radio bearer
  • the source network device sends a message 1 to the target network device, and the message 1 includes third information and fourth information, and the information elements of different user identities are located in different positions of the message 1, for example, The cell where the third information of the first user identity is located is at position 1 of message 1, and the cell where the fourth information of the second user identity is located is at position 2 of message 1.
  • the target network device may determine that the third message is the identity of the first user and the fourth information is the identity of the second user according to the positions of the third information and the fourth information in the message 1.
  • the third information may be the context of the identity of the first user, and the fourth information may be the context of the identity of the second user; for another example, the third information is a session resource establishment request of the identity of the first user, and the fourth information is the second user.
  • Identity PDU session establishment request for another example, the third information is the PDU session of the first user identity, and the fourth information is the PDU session of the second user identity; for another example, the third information is the DRB of the first user identity, and the fourth information is the DRB of the first user identity.
  • the information is the DRB of the second user's identity.
  • the response message may include first response information, second response information, and fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate
  • the first response information is the response information of the first user identity
  • the second response information is the response information of the second user identity.
  • the first response information may be a PDU session resource admission response of the first user identity
  • the second response information may be a PDU session resource admission response of the second user identity
  • the first response information may be the first user identity
  • the second response information may be the PDU session resource rejection response of the second user identity.
  • the response message 1 may include the first response information and the second response information, and the information element containing the information of different user identities is in the response message Different positions of 1, for example, the cell where the first response information of the first user identity is located is at position 1 of the response message 1, and the cell where the second response information of the second user identity is located at position 2 of the response message 1.
  • the target network device may determine that the first response information is the identity of the first user, and the second response information is the identity of the second user according to the positions of the first response information and the second response information in the response message 1.
  • the first response information may be a PDU session resource admission response of the first user identity
  • the second response information may be a PDU session resource admission response of the second user identity
  • the first response information may be the first user identity
  • the second response information may be the PDU session resource rejection response of the second user identity.
  • the PDU session resource admission response of the first user identity may carry the data transfer address of the first user identity
  • the PDU session resource admission response of the second user identity may carry the data transfer address of the second user identity.
  • the first user identity and the second user identity correspond to different data transfer addresses.
  • the data transfer address includes the transport layer address and the general packet radio service tunneling protocol (GPRS tunnelling protocol, GTP) tunnel port identifier.
  • GPRS tunnelling protocol GTP
  • the terminal device can establish the RRC connection of the second user identity according to the configuration information included in the first RRC message of the first user identity as the second user identity, avoiding the need for the terminal device to Re-initiating random access as the second user and re-establishing an RRC connection independently can also avoid the failure of the terminal device to initiate random access as the second user, which is beneficial to improve the success rate of random access, even if the terminal device does not use
  • the random access initiated by the second user identity directly inherits the random access of the first user identity, which can also avoid the resource overhead caused by the random access, thereby helping to improve the transmission performance.
  • the method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6-9.
  • the following method is described with the network device as the base station, the first user identity of the terminal device is SIMA/USIMA, and the second user identity of the terminal device is SIMB/USIMB.
  • two SIMs may belong to one UE or two UEs, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 shows a method 600 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 600 corresponds to the aforementioned situation a), and the method 600 includes:
  • the base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, or SIMA and SIMB belong to the same terminal device.
  • S610 that the base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB refer to the description of the manner in which the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity in the aforementioned method 500, which will not be described in detail here to avoid repetition.
  • the base station sends the first RRC message of the SIMA to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the base station.
  • the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used to instruct the SIMB to use the RRC connection of the SIMA.
  • the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device is established by default before S620, and the base station can send any RRC message of the SIMA to the terminal device on the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device, such as the first RRC message.
  • the first RRC message in S620 may be an RRC connection release message of SIMA.
  • S630 The terminal device determines that the SIMB can use the RRC connection of the SIMA according to the configuration information. It can also be understood that the terminal device determines that the SIMB can inherit the RRC connection of the SIMA according to the configuration information.
  • the configuration information may include SIMB protocol stack parameters and/or key information, and the terminal device modifies the SIMA RRC connection according to the SIMB protocol stack parameters and/or key information to obtain its own RRC connection.
  • SIMB protocol stack parameters include service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer parameters, packet data convergence protocol control (PDCP) layer parameters, RLC layer parameters, MAC layer parameters, and PHY layer parameters At least one of the parameters.
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol control
  • the SIMB can use the RRC connection of the SIMA, that is, the RRC connection of the SIMA can only be used by one SIM of the terminal device at the same time.
  • the RRC connection can be referred to as the RRC connection of the SIMB, and the SIMA can again inherit the RRC connection of the SIMB.
  • FIG. 7 shows a method 700 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 700 corresponds to the aforementioned situation b).
  • the method 700 includes:
  • the base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, or SIMA and SIMB belong to the same terminal device.
  • S710 that the base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB refer to the description of the manner in which the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity in the foregoing method 500, which will not be described in detail here to avoid repetition.
  • the base station sends a first RRC message to the SIMA of the terminal device, and the SIMA of the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the base station.
  • the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information includes RACH resources.
  • the base station can send any SIMA RRC message, such as the first RRC message, to the terminal device on the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device.
  • the first RRC message in S720 may be an RRC connection release message of SIMA, or an RRC reconfiguration message of SIMA.
  • the SIMB of the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the base station according to the RACH resource included in the configuration information.
  • the RACH resource may include a random access preamble index (the random access preamble index is used to indicate the random access preamble) and a mask index corresponding to the random access resource, and the mask index is used to indicate when the random access preamble is sent.
  • the SIMB of the terminal device sends the random access preamble indicated by the random access preamble index to the base station on the time-frequency resource indicated by the mask index.
  • the base station After receiving the random access preamble sent by the SIMB of the terminal equipment, the base station sends an RAR to the SIMB of the terminal equipment, where the RAR carries at least one of T-CRNTI, uplink authorization information, and TA.
  • the uplink grant information is used to indicate information such as frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and MCS used to send an RRC connection request message or send an RRC reestablishment request message or send an RRC recovery request message.
  • the SIMB of the terminal device sends an RRC connection establishment request message or an RRC reestablishment request message or an RRC recovery resource to the base station on the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information. Request message.
  • the base station After receiving the RRC connection establishment request or the RRC reestablishment request message or the RRC recovery request message, the base station sends an RRC connection setup (RRC connection setup) message or sends an RRC reestablishment message or sends an RRC recovery message to the SIMB of the terminal device.
  • RRC connection setup RRC connection setup
  • the main purpose is to send the wireless configuration information of the SIMB to the terminal device.
  • the RRC connection establishment message includes wireless configuration information configured by the base station for the SIMB of the terminal device, and the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters of SRB1.
  • the RRC reconstruction message and the RRC recovery message are used to indicate the configuration information before recovery (such as the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
  • the terminal device After configuring the protocol stack parameters of SRB1 according to the wireless configuration information, the terminal device sends an RRC connection setup complete message or sends an RRC reestablishment complete message or sends an RRC recovery complete message to the base station to indicate that the RRC establishment has been completed. connection.
  • the base station may send the RACH resource of the SIMB of the terminal device through the first RRC message of the SIMA of the terminal device, so as to prevent the terminal device from needing to perform random access in a competitive manner, and reduce the delay of the random access of the SIMB. It can also improve the success rate of SIMB random access, which is beneficial to improving transmission performance.
  • FIG. 8 shows a method 800 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 800 corresponds to the aforementioned situation c), and the method 800 includes:
  • the base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, or SIMA and SIMB belong to the same terminal device.
  • the base station sends a first RRC message to the SIMA of the terminal device, and the SIMA of the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the base station.
  • the first RRC message includes configuration information.
  • the configuration information includes establishment of the SIMB uplink authorization information of the terminal device and establishment of the terminal.
  • the C-RNTI of the RRC connection of the SIMB of the device may also include the TA.
  • the uplink grant information is used to indicate the frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and MCS information for sending the RRC connection request message or sending the RRC reestablishment request message or sending the RRC recovery request message.
  • the base station can send any SIMA RRC message, such as the first RRC message, to the terminal device on the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device.
  • the first RRC message in S820 may be an RRC connection release message of SIMA, or an RRC reconfiguration message of SIMA.
  • the SIMB of the terminal device sends an RRC connection establishment request message or an RRC reestablishment request message or an RRC restoration request message to the base station on the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information for sending an RRC connection request message or sending an RRC reestablishment request message or sending an RRC restoration request message. Request message.
  • the SIMB of the terminal device sends an RRC connection request message or sends an RRC reestablishment request message or sends an RRC recovery request message to the base station according to the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information to send an RRC connection establishment request message to the base station. Either send an RRC reconstruction request message or send an RRC recovery request message.
  • the base station After receiving the RRC connection establishment request, the base station sends an RRC connection setup (RRC connection setup) message or an RRC reestablishment message or an RRC recovery message to the SIMB of the terminal device.
  • RRC connection setup RRC connection setup
  • the main purpose of these RRC messages is to send the wireless configuration information of the SIMB to the terminal device.
  • the RRC connection establishment message includes wireless configuration information configured by the base station for the SIMB of the terminal device, and the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters of SRB1.
  • the RRC reconstruction message and the RRC recovery message are used to indicate the wireless configuration information before the recovery (such as the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
  • the terminal device After configuring the protocol stack parameters of SRB1 according to the wireless configuration information, the terminal device sends an RRC connection setup complete message or sends an RRC reestablishment complete message or sends an RRC recovery complete message to the base station to indicate that the RRC establishment has been completed. connection.
  • the base station can send the uplink authorization information and C-RNTI of the SIMB of the terminal device through the first RRC message of the SIMA of the terminal device. This avoids the need for the SIMB of the terminal device to send a random access preamble to the base station, and also avoids The terminal device needs to obtain the SIMB uplink authorization information and the C-RNTI process from the RAR sent by the base station, which can reduce the delay of the SIMB random access of the terminal device, and can also improve the success rate of the SIMB random access, which is beneficial to improve the transmission performance.
  • Fig. 9 shows a method 900 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 900 corresponds to the aforementioned cases d) and e).
  • the method 900 includes:
  • the base station determines that the terminal device supports USIMA and USIMB, or USIMA and USIMB belong to the same terminal device.
  • the base station sends a first RRC message to the USIMA of the terminal device, and the USIMA of the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the base station.
  • the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the USIMB.
  • the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters and/or keys. Based on the current wireless configuration information of the USIMA, the terminal device can modify the wireless configuration information of the USIMB to obtain the wireless configuration corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the USIMB ( For example, the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
  • the RRC connection of the USIMA of the terminal device is established by default before S920, and the base station can send any RRC message of the USIMA to the terminal device on the RRC connection of the USIMA of the terminal device, such as the first RRC message.
  • the first RRC message may include a USIMB NAS message.
  • the first RRC message in S920 may be an RRC connection release message of USIMA, or an RRC reconfiguration message of USIMA.
  • the terminal device determines whether the RRC connection of the USIMA can be used by the USIMB, or the terminal device determines whether the first RRC message of the USIMA can include the RRC message of the USIMB.
  • the terminal device needs to determine that the NAS message is USIMB.
  • the determination method refer to the determination method in method 500. In order to avoid repeating the embodiments of the present application, it will not be described here. Detailed Description.
  • the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the USIMB, and the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters and/or keys.
  • the terminal device determines that the RRC connection of USIMA can be used by USIMB, or the terminal device determines that the first RRC message of USIMA can include the RRC message of USIMB, the terminal device can use the current wireless configuration information of USIMA according to The wireless configuration information of the USIMB is modified to obtain the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the USIMB (for example, the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
  • the USIMA and the USIMB may have different RRC layer entities, and the different RRC layers may serve the USIMA and the USIMB at the same time.
  • the terminal device retains both the USIMA protocol stack parameters and the USIMB protocol stack parameters, and/or the terminal device can retain both the USIMA key and the USIMB key. Key.
  • USIMA and USIMB can have different RRC layer entities
  • RRC layer entities PDCP layer entity/RLC layer entity/MAC layer entity may be the same , Can also be different
  • USIMA and USIMB use different NAS.
  • FIG. 12 for the user plane protocol, USIMA and USIMB use different SDAP layer entities/PDCP layer entities/RLC layer entities (the same or different MAC layer entities).
  • FIG. 12 USIMA and USIMB use the same SDAP/PDCP and different RLC layer entities (the same or different MAC layer entities).
  • USIMA and USIMB may have the same RRC layer entity, and the same RRC layer may serve different USIMA and USIMB at different times, and only one USIM at the same time. That is, USIMA and USIMB use the RRC layer in a time division manner. If at a certain moment, the RRC connection of USIMA can only be used by USIMB, so that the terminal device can modify the RRC connection protocol stack parameters that establish USIMA to the protocol stack parameters of USIMB.
  • USIMA can continue to use the RRC connection, and the terminal device Modify the USIMB protocol stack parameters to the USIMA protocol stack parameters; or, in method 900, the RRC connection of the USIMA can only be used by the USIMB at a certain time, so that the terminal device uses the USIMB key.
  • the USIMA can Continue to use the RRC connection, and the terminal device uses the USIMA key.
  • USIMA and USIMB can have the same RRC layer entity, for the control plane protocol, as shown in Figure 13, USIMA and USIMB use the same RRC layer entity/PDCP layer entity/RLC layer entity (even the MAC layer entity is also Same), USIMA and USIMB use different NAS.
  • RRC layer entity/PDCP layer entity/RLC layer entity even the MAC layer entity is also Same
  • USIMA and USIMB use different NAS.
  • For user plane protocols as shown in Figure 11, USIMA and USIMB use different SDAP layer entities/PDCP layer entities/RLC layer entities (the MAC layer entities may be the same or different); or for user plane protocols, USIMA and USIMB use the same
  • the SDAP layer entity/PDCP layer entity adopts different RLC layer entities (the same or different MAC layer entities)
  • USIMA and USIMB can use terminal equipment to establish an RRC connection with USIMA, for example, by carrying the information of two USIM cards in the same RRC message, or USIMA and USIMB can use terminal equipment in a time-division multiplexing manner RRC connection established with USIMA.
  • the terminal device does not need to specifically establish RRC connections for the USIMB, which can reduce the number of RRC connections.
  • the terminal device does not need to initiate a random access procedure for the USIMB, which can avoid signaling overhead and help improve transmission performance.
  • the method 1400 includes:
  • the terminal device uses the SIMA RRC connection to send sixth indication information with SIMB MDT information to the base station, that is, the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device has SIMB MDT information, and the base station can learn after receiving the sixth indication information The terminal device has the MDT information of the SIMB.
  • the MDT information is the measurement result obtained by the terminal device using the SIMB identity to measure, and the measurement result reflects the current network coverage status.
  • the terminal device uses the SIMB identity to collect the signal quality of the current cell and neighboring cells.
  • the sixth indication information may be carried in an RRC setup complete (RRCsetupcomplete) message, an RRC reselection complete (RRCresumecomplete) message, an RRC reconfiguration complete (RRCreconfigurationcomplete) message, or an RRC retablishmentcomplete (RRCretablishmentcomplete) message.
  • RRC setup complete RRCsetupcomplete
  • RRCresumecomplete RRC reselection complete
  • RRC reconfigurationcomplete RRC reconfiguration complete
  • RRCretablishmentcomplete RRC retablishmentcomplete
  • the sixth indication information may also indicate indication information with SIMB radio link failure or access failure and other record information.
  • the base station uses the RRC connection of the SIMA to send an MDT request message to the terminal device, where the MDT request message is used to request the terminal device to send the MDT information of the SIMB.
  • the base station when the base station needs the terminal device to report the MDT information of the SIMB, it can send an MDT request message to the terminal device.
  • the base station may also send a request to report record information such as a wireless link failure or access failure of the SIMB to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends a fourth RRC message to the base station, where the fourth RRC message includes the MDT information of the SIMB.
  • the fourth RRC message may also include record information such as a radio link failure or access failure of the SIMB.
  • the base station sends an MDT request message to the terminal device.
  • the MDT request message may carry seventh indication information.
  • the seventh indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to report the MDT information of which SIM card.
  • the fourth RRC message sent by the base station carries the MDT information of the SIM indicated by the seventh indication information.
  • the seventh indication information indicates that the terminal device reports the MDT information of the SIMA, and the terminal device reports the MDT information of the SIMA in the fourth RRC message.
  • the terminal device reports the MDT information of the SIMB in the fourth message.
  • the base station sends an MDT request message to the terminal device.
  • the MDT request message is used to request the terminal device to report the MDT information.
  • the terminal device can report the SIMA MDT information to the base station through the fourth RRC message.
  • SIMB MDT information 2 can carry eighth indication information and ninth indication information.
  • the eighth indication information is used to indicate that MDT information 1 is SIMA
  • the ninth indication information is used to indicate that MDT information 2 is SIMB. of.
  • the base stations of the two SIMs may configure different measurement configurations for the two SIMs of the same terminal device, such as the measurement interval (gap) configuration, then the terminal device needs to be two SIMs Blind detection is performed separately. Due to the limited measurement capability of the terminal device, the measurement gap configured by the two base stations for the two SIMs will exceed the measurement capability of the terminal device, causing the terminal device to be unable to perform measurement.
  • a method 1500 for reporting measurement configuration is provided, and the method 1500 includes:
  • S1510 The terminal device sends the SIMA measurement configuration to the SIMB base station, and the SIMB base station receives the SIMA measurement configuration.
  • the measurement configuration of SIMA includes the gap type of SIMA (Is it a terminal device level GAP type, or a frequency range 1 (frequency rang 1, FR1) level GAP type, or frequency range 2 (frequency rang 2, FR2) Level GAP), at least one of gap time information, measurement frequency, measurement pilot signal type, subcarrier interval corresponding to the measurement pilot signal, and the number of measurement report events.
  • the gap type of SIMA Is it a terminal device level GAP type, or a frequency range 1 (frequency rang 1, FR1) level GAP type, or frequency range 2 (frequency rang 2, FR2) Level GAP
  • at least one of gap time information Is it a terminal device level GAP type, or a frequency range 1 (frequency rang 1, FR1) level GAP type, or frequency range 2 (frequency rang 2, FR2) Level GAP
  • at least one of gap time information Is it a terminal device level GAP type, or a frequency range 1 (frequency rang 1, FR1) level GAP type, or frequency range 2 (frequency rang
  • S1520 The base station of the SIMB determines the measurement configuration of the SIMB according to the measurement configuration of the SIMA reported by the terminal device.
  • the base station of USIM B After the base station of USIM B receives the configuration information of USIMA, the base station determines the upper limit of the measurement configuration for USIM B according to the total capabilities of the terminal equipment and the reported configuration information of USIM A, thereby ensuring that the total measurement configuration of USIM A and USIM B is different. Will exceed the total measurement capability of the terminal device.
  • the base station of the SIMB sends the determined measurement configuration of the SIMB to the terminal device, and the terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration of the SIMB.
  • the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity can be used by the first user identity and the second user identity at the same time, and the terminal device and the network device are in the RRC chain of the first user identity.
  • the information transmitted on the road may be the identity of the first user or the identity of the second user. Therefore, the terminal device and the network device should distinguish between the information transmitted as the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the terminal device and the network The device can display instructions, such as direct instructions to indicate whether the transmitted information is the first user identity or the second user identity; or the terminal device and the network device can use implicit instructions, such as different logical channels corresponding to different user identities , Different BWPs correspond to different user identities, and different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and so on. Therefore, when any RRC connection established by using the first user identity transmits information of two user identities, it is within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application to distinguish which user identity the information belongs to by a display instruction or an implicit instruction.
  • the serving base stations of SIMA and SIMB may be the same or different. If the serving base stations of SIMA and SIMB are different, then the base station of SIMA can interact with the base station of SIMB, so as to achieve the establishment of SIMB.
  • the purpose of the RRC connection for example, the first RRC message sent by the terminal device to the base station of SIMA can carry the base station identity of SIMB, and the base station of SIMA can send information to the base station corresponding to the base station identity of SIMB, for example, send a protocol stack for requesting SIMB. Parameters and SIMB key information.
  • serving cells of SIMA and SIMB may also be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device supports both SIMA and SIMB.
  • SIMA and SIMB can belong to different terminal devices, for example, SIMA terminal devices.
  • SIMA terminal devices There can be mutual communication and interaction with SIMB terminal devices, for example, SIMA terminal devices and SIMB terminal devices interact through wired or wireless (such as WIFI).
  • the configuration information in the embodiment of the present application includes wireless configuration information, that is, the configuration information includes any configuration for a terminal device to initiate random access or establish an RRC connection, and the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters for establishing SRB1.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 1600 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1600 may correspond to the terminal device described in the foregoing method, or may correspond to the chip or component of the terminal device, and the apparatus 1600 Each module or unit in the above method can be used to execute each action or process performed by the terminal device in the above method.
  • the apparatus 1600 for establishing an RRC connection supports the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the 1600 may include a transceiving unit 1610 and a establishing unit 1620.
  • the transceiver unit 1610 is configured to receive a first radio resource control RRC message of the first user identity from a network device as the first user identity, where the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used for the The apparatus 1600 establishes an RRC connection with the identity of the second user;
  • the establishment unit 1620 is configured to establish an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user.
  • the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource for the establishment unit 1620 to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user, and a establishment unit 1620 to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user. At least one of the uplink authorization information and the temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of the cell used for the establishment unit 1620 to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user.
  • the configuration information is used to instruct the apparatus 1600 to use the RRC connection established by the apparatus 1600 as the first user as the second user;
  • the establishing unit 1620 is specifically configured to use the apparatus 1600 to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the first user using the identity of the second user according to the configuration information.
  • the establishing unit 1620 is specifically configured to use the RRC connection established by the apparatus 1600 as the first user as the second user according to the configuration information, and the apparatus 1600 can use the apparatus 1600 as the first user as the first user.
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the apparatus 1600
  • the second RRC message includes the configuration information
  • the apparatus 1600 further includes:
  • the determining unit is configured to determine, according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message, that the apparatus 1600 can use the RRC connection established by the apparatus 1600 in the identity of the first user as the second user.
  • the first RRC message includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used by the apparatus 1600 to communicate with the second user
  • the identity establishes an RRC connection
  • the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the first indication information, that the apparatus 1600 can use the RRC connection established by the apparatus 1600 with the identity of the first user as the second user.
  • the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the position of the cell where the configuration information is located in the first RRC message, that the apparatus 1600 can use the apparatus 1600 as the second user.
  • the cells in which the configuration information of the different user identities of the apparatus 1600 are located are in different positions in the first RRC message.
  • the first RRC message includes a correspondence
  • the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate that different logical channels of the same bearer correspond to different logical channels.
  • Different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship It is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used by the apparatus 1600 to determine the first user identity or The identity of the second user.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
  • the transceiving unit 1610 is further configured to receive a third RRC message from the network device as the first user, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging information The information carries the identifier of the second user identity of the device 1600.
  • the transceiving unit 1610 is further configured to send a fourth user as the first user to the network device before establishing an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user.
  • the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the RRC release message is used to indicate to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the apparatus 1600 or to indicate the apparatus 1600
  • the RRC connection of the first user identity enters an inactive state.
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 1700 for establishing an RRC connection according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1700 may correspond to the network equipment or base station described in the above method, and may also correspond to the chip or component of the network equipment or base station, and Each module or unit in the apparatus 1700 may be used to execute each action or processing performed by the network equipment or base station in the above method.
  • the apparatus 1700 for establishing an RRC connection may include an acquiring unit 1710 and a transceiver. Unit 1720.
  • the obtaining unit 1710 is configured to obtain configuration information, where the configuration information is used by the terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as the second user;
  • the transceiver unit 1720 is configured to send a first RRC message to a terminal device with a first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
  • the apparatus 1700 further includes a determining unit, configured to determine that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the first user identity before the first RRC message is sent to the first user identity terminal device.
  • the second user identity configured to determine that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the first user identity before the first RRC message is sent to the first user identity terminal device. The second user identity.
  • the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource used for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity, and a random access channel RACH resource used for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity.
  • the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device as the second user to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes the configuration information.
  • the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used by the terminal device to communicate with the second user.
  • the identity establishes the RRC connection.
  • the first RRC message includes a correspondence
  • the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate that different logical channels of the same bearer correspond to different logical channels.
  • Different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the first correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence The relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the corresponding relationship is used for the terminal device to determine the first User identity or said second user identity.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
  • the acquiring unit 1710 is further configured to send a request message to the distribution unit DU, where the request message is used to request the protocol stack parameter of the second user identity.
  • the transceiving unit 1720 is further configured to send a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging information The information carries the identifier of the second user identity of the terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1720 is further configured to receive a fourth RRC message sent by the terminal device of the first user identity, where the fourth RRC message includes the second user identity of the terminal device Minimize drive test MDT information;
  • the determining unit is further configured to determine the MDT information of the second user identity according to the fourth RRC message.
  • the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device or to indicate The first user identity of the terminal device enters an RRC inactive state.
  • the apparatus 1600 of each of the foregoing solutions has the function of implementing the corresponding steps performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method
  • the apparatus 1700 of each of the foregoing solutions has the function of implementing the corresponding steps performed by the network device in the foregoing method
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware or software
  • the corresponding software is implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions; for example, the sending unit can be replaced by a communication interface, the receiving unit can be replaced by a communication interface, and other units, such as the determining unit, can be replaced by a processor to execute each method separately Transceiving operations and related processing operations in the embodiment.
  • the communication interface of a device is used for the device to communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface may be a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or another type of communication interface, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor can be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, baseband related processing
  • the communication interface can be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, information exchange.
  • the above-mentioned devices may be respectively arranged on separate chips, or at least part or all of them may be arranged on the same chip.
  • the processor can be further divided into an analog baseband processor and a digital baseband processor, where the analog baseband processor and the communication interface can be integrated on the same chip, and the digital baseband processor can be set on a separate chip. With the continuous development of integrated circuit technology, more and more devices can be integrated on the same chip.
  • a digital baseband processor can be combined with a variety of application processors (such as but not limited to graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.) Integrated on the same chip.
  • application processors such as but not limited to graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.
  • Such a chip may be called a system on chip (SOC).
  • SOC system on chip
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 1800 for establishing an RRC connection.
  • the apparatus 1800 includes a processor 1810, a communication interface 1820, and a memory 1830.
  • the processor 1810, the communication interface 1820, and the memory 1830 are coupled to communicate with each other.
  • the memory 1830 is used to store instructions, and the processor 1810 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 1830 to control the communication interface 1820 to send signals and/or receive signal.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the communication interface 1820 is configured to receive the first radio resource control RRC message of the first user identity from the network device as the first user identity,
  • the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used by the apparatus 1800 to establish an RRC connection as the second user;
  • the processor 1810 is configured to establish an RRC connection as the second user according to the configuration information. RRC connection.
  • the communication interface 1820 is used to obtain configuration information, and the configuration information is used by the terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as the second user; the communication interface 1820 also Used to send a first RRC message to a terminal device with a first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
  • the apparatus in FIG. 16 or the apparatus in FIG. 17 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by the apparatus 1800 in FIG. 18, and may be used to execute the respective steps and/or corresponding terminal equipment and network equipment in the foregoing method embodiments. Or process.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method in the above embodiment .
  • the various embodiments in this application can also be combined with each other.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium, the computer-readable interpretation stores a program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method in the above-mentioned embodiment .
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a system for establishing an RRC connection, including the apparatus 1600 in FIG. 16 and the apparatus 1700 in FIG. 17. Or the system includes the devices in the two possible implementation manners shown in FIG. 18.
  • the foregoing method embodiments in the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a processor or implemented by a processor.
  • the processor may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the foregoing processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA ready-made programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate Synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • direct memory bus random memory Take memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
  • the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the computer program product may include one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a terminal device, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic disk), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a method and device for establishing an RRC connection. The method comprises: a terminal device being able to use a second user identity to establish an RRC connection of the second user identity according to configuration information comprised in a first RRC message of a first user identity. A terminal device needing to use a second user identity to re-initiate random access and to independently re-establish an RRC connection is prevented, and the situation whereby the terminal device fails as a result of initiating random access by means of the second user identify can also be prevented, thereby facilitating improving the success rate of random access, and even leading to the terminal device not needing to use the second user identity to initiate random access and instead directly inheriting an RRC connection of a first user identity, so that the resource overhead caused by random access can also be avoided, thereby facilitating improving the transmission performance.

Description

建立无线资源控制连接的方法和装置Method and device for establishing wireless resource control connection 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及通信领域中建立无线资源控制连接的方法和装置。This application relates to the communication field, and more specifically, to a method and apparatus for establishing a radio resource control connection in the communication field.
背景技术Background technique
随着通信技术的发展,很多终端设备(如手机)都具备支持多个用户身份模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡的功能,例如支持两个SIM卡。终端设备建立无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接的过程包括发起随机接入过程以及在随机接入完成之后终端设备和网络设备交互建立RRC连接的消息等。随机接入包括基于竞争或非竞争的随机接入,对于竞争的随机接入,由于资源有限终端设备需要为多个SIM卡竞争随机接入资源导致随机接入的时延增加,甚至会导致随机接入失败等情况,从而导致传输性能下降;对于非竞争的随机接入,终端设备的多个SIM卡需要占用较多的随机接入资源,会增加随机接入的资源开销。此外,终端设备的每个SIM卡建立RRC连接时发起随机接入的过程导致建立RRC的时延比较大,传输性能下降。因此,亟需一种如何提高支持多个SIM卡的终端设备建立RRC连接的传输性能的方法。With the development of communication technology, many terminal devices (such as mobile phones) have the function of supporting multiple subscriber identification module (SIM) cards, for example, supporting two SIM cards. The process for the terminal device to establish a radio resource control (RRC) connection includes initiating a random access process and after the random access is completed, the terminal device and the network device exchange messages to establish an RRC connection, and so on. Random access includes random access based on contention or non-competition. For random access based on contention, terminal equipment needs to compete for random access resources for multiple SIM cards due to limited resources, which will increase the delay of random access and even cause random access. Circumstances such as access failure, resulting in a decrease in transmission performance; for non-competitive random access, multiple SIM cards of the terminal device need to occupy more random access resources, which will increase the resource overhead of random access. In addition, the process of initiating random access when each SIM card of the terminal device establishes an RRC connection results in a relatively long RRC establishment delay and a decrease in transmission performance. Therefore, there is an urgent need for a method for improving the transmission performance of a terminal device supporting multiple SIM cards in establishing an RRC connection.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种建立RRC连接的方法和装置,能够减少建立RRC连接的信令开销,也会降低随机接入的时延,有利于提高传输性能。The present application provides a method and device for establishing an RRC connection, which can reduce the signaling overhead of establishing an RRC connection, and also reduces the delay of random access, which is beneficial to improving transmission performance.
第一方面,提供了一种建立RRC连接的方法,所述方法适用于终端设备,所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份,所述方法包括:In the first aspect, a method for establishing an RRC connection is provided, the method is applicable to a terminal device, and the terminal device supports a first user identity and a second user identity, and the method includes:
所述终端设备以第一用户身份从网络设备接收所述第一用户身份的第一RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括配置信息,所述配置信息用于所述终端设备以第二用户身份建立RRC连接;所述终端设备以第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接。The terminal device receives the first RRC message of the first user identity from the network device as the first user identity, the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used by the terminal device as the second user identity Establish an RRC connection; the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user.
因此,本申请实施例中建立RRC连接的方法,终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据第一用户身份的第一RRC消息中包括的配置信息建立第二用户身份的RRC连接,避免终端设备需要以第二用户身份重新发起随机接入,重新独立建立RRC连接,也能避免终端设备以第二用户身份发起随机接入导致失败的情况,有利于提高随机接入的成功率,甚至终端设备不用以第二用户身份发起随机接入直接继承第一用户身份的RRC连接,也能够避免随机接入带来的资源开销,从而有利于提高传输性能。Therefore, in the method for establishing an RRC connection in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can establish the RRC connection of the second user identity according to the configuration information included in the first RRC message of the first user identity as the second user identity, avoiding the need for the terminal device to Re-initiating random access as the second user and re-establishing an RRC connection independently can also avoid the failure of the terminal device to initiate random access as the second user, which is beneficial to improve the success rate of random access, even if the terminal device does not use The random access initiated by the second user identity directly inherits the RRC connection of the first user identity, which can also avoid the resource overhead caused by the random access, thereby helping to improve the transmission performance.
可选地,终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备以第二用户身份继承第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,则终端设备不用以第二用户身份发起随机接入,也不需要以第二用户身份再建立RRC连接。在这种情况下,配置信息用于指示所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的 RRC连接。Optionally, the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device inherits the RRC connection established by the first user identity as the second user identity, and the terminal device does not need to initiate a random connection as the second user identity. In, there is no need to establish an RRC connection as the second user. In this case, the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device as the second user to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
可选地,终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备以第一用户身份和第二用户身份同时使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,则终端设备不用以第二用户身份发起随机接入,也不需要以第二用户身份再建立RRC连接。Optionally, the terminal device establishing an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user can be understood as: the terminal device uses both the first user identity and the second user identity to use the terminal device to establish the RRC connection with the first user identity at the same time, then the terminal device The second user identity is not used to initiate random access, and the RRC connection does not need to be established again as the second user identity.
可选地,终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备以第一用户身份和第二用户身份以时分复用的方式共同使用所述终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。Optionally, the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device uses the first user identity and the second user identity in a time-division multiplexing manner to use the terminal device as the first user identity. RRC connection established.
可选地,终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备利用配置信息以第二用户身份发起随机接入,配置信息可以包括随机接入信道资源(random access channel,RACH),而不需要利用竞争的方式获取发起随机接入的资源,能够提高随机接入的成功率,也能降低随机接入的时延。Optionally, the terminal device establishing an RRC connection as the second user according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device uses the configuration information to initiate random access as the second user, and the configuration information may include random access channel resources (random access channel, RACH), without the need to use competition to obtain resources for initiating random access, which can improve the success rate of random access and reduce the delay of random access.
可选地,终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备利用配置信息以第二用户身份建立RRC连接,例如配置信息可以包括用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI,这样终端设备无需以第二用户身份发起随机接入,直接根据上行授权信息指示的资源向网络设备发送第二用户身份的RRC连接建立请求或RRC重建请求或RRC恢复请求,终端设备可以利用C-RNTI以第二用户身份与网络设备进行通信。Optionally, the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information may be understood as: the terminal device uses the configuration information to establish the RRC connection as the second user identity. For example, the configuration information may include 2. The uplink authorization information for establishing the RRC connection with the user identity and the temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of the cell used for the terminal device to establish the RRC connection as the second user identity, so that the terminal device does not need to initiate random access as the second user identity Directly send the RRC connection establishment request or the RRC reestablishment request or the RRC recovery request of the second user identity to the network device according to the resources indicated by the uplink authorization information, and the terminal device can use the C-RNTI to communicate with the network device as the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接,包括:所述终端设备根据所述配置信息以第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,所述终端设备以第一用户身份能够使用所述终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。即终端设备可以以第一用户身份和第二用户身份同时使用或者时分复用的方式使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。In some possible implementations, the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information includes: the terminal device uses the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information to For the RRC connection established with the identity of the first user, the terminal device can use the RRC connection established with the identity of the first user by the terminal device as the first user. That is, the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity in a simultaneous use of the first user identity and the second user identity or in a time division multiplexing manner.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,所述第二RRC消息包括所述配置信息,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备根据所述第一RRC消息包括的所述第二RRC消息确定所述终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。可以通过RRC消息的嵌套确定以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, the second RRC message includes the configuration information, and the method further includes: The terminal device determines, according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message, that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established with the first user identity by the terminal device as the second user identity. The RRC connection established as the first user using the terminal device as the second user can be determined through the nesting of RRC messages.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的所述配置信息用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息确定所述终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。即可以通过第一RRC消息中显式的指示确定以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used by the terminal device in the Establishing an RRC connection with a second user identity, and the method further includes: the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, that the terminal device can use the terminal device as the second user to establish an RRC connection with the first user identity. RRC connection. That is, the RRC connection established as the first user using the terminal device as the second user can be determined through an explicit indication in the first RRC message.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备根据所述配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息中的位置确定所述终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,所述终端设备的不同用户身份的配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置。协议可以规定网络设备配置终端设备的不同 用户身份的配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: the terminal device determines that the terminal device can use the terminal device as the second user according to the position of the cell where the configuration information is located in the first RRC message. For the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the identity of the first user, the information elements where the configuration information of the different user identities of the terminal device are located are in different positions of the first RRC message. The protocol may stipulate that the information elements in which the network equipment configures the configuration information of different user identities of the terminal equipment are located in different positions of the first RRC message.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括对应关系,所述对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes a correspondence, the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate different logical channels of the same bearer Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding The relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the corresponding relationship is used for the terminal device to determine the first User identity or said second user identity.
这样,终端设备后续接收到数据包(数据包包括通过SRB传输的RRC消息和/或通过DRB传输的数据)之后,由于终端设备同时支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份,终端设备可以根据对应关系确定该数据包为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。In this way, after the terminal device subsequently receives the data packet (the data packet includes the RRC message transmitted through the SRB and/or the data transmitted through the DRB), since the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity at the same time, the terminal device can follow the corresponding The relationship determines whether the data packet belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息还包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数和所述第二用户身份的密钥信息中的至少一种。In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
可选地,密钥信息可以包括第二用户身份的密钥(例如,网络设备可以根据第一用户身份的密钥衍生出第二用户身份的密钥)或者包括用于生成第二用户身份的密钥的信息或者参数等。Optionally, the key information may include the key of the second user identity (for example, the network device may derive the key of the second user identity according to the key of the first user identity) or include the key used to generate the second user identity. Key information or parameters, etc.
这样,终端设备可以将第一用户身份的协议栈参数修改为配置信息包括的第二用户身份的协议栈参数,这样可以得到第二用户身份的协议栈参数。In this way, the terminal device can modify the protocol stack parameters of the first user identity to the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity included in the configuration information, so that the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity can be obtained.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备以第一用户身份从所述网络设备接收第三RRC消息,所述第三RRC消息包括第一寻呼信息,所述第一寻呼信息携带所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的标识。在终端设备还没有确定第二用户身份是否能使用第一用户身份的RRC连接,或者终端设备还没有以第二用户身份完成随机接入的过程时,网络设备可以将寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备的寻呼信息携带在第一用户身份的第三RRC消息中,避免网络设备无法寻呼到第二用户身份的终端设备。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: the terminal device receives a third RRC message from the network device as the first user identity, the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first user A paging message carries the identity of the second user of the terminal device. When the terminal device has not determined whether the second user identity can use the RRC connection of the first user identity, or the terminal device has not completed the random access process as the second user identity, the network device may page the second user identity The paging information of the terminal device is carried in the third RRC message of the first user identity, so as to prevent the network device from being unable to page the terminal device of the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,在所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接之前,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份向所述网络设备发送第四RRC消息,所述第四RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的最小化路测MDT信息或无线链路失败信息或接入失败信息。这样,可以避免第二用户身份的MDT信息或无线链路失败信息或接入失败信息过时失效或删除。In some possible implementation manners, before the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user identity, the method further includes: The network device sends a fourth RRC message, where the fourth RRC message includes minimizing drive test MDT information or radio link failure information or access failure information of the second user identity of the terminal device. In this way, the MDT information or the wireless link failure information or the access failure information of the second user identity can be prevented from being outdated or deleted.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息为RRC释放消息或者RRC重配置消息,所述RRC释放消息用于指示释放所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接或者用于指示所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接进入非激活态。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device or to Instruct the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device to enter an inactive state.
在一些可能的实现方式中,第一RRC消息可能包括第一用户身份的NAS消息,也有可能包括第一用户身份的NAS消息和第二用户身份的NAS消息,也有可能包括第二用户身份的NAS消息,终端设备需要确定第一RRC消息中的NAS消息为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。In some possible implementations, the first RRC message may include the NAS message of the first user identity, may also include the NAS message of the first user identity and the NAS message of the second user identity, and may also include the NAS message of the second user identity. Message, the terminal device needs to determine whether the NAS message in the first RRC message belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,若第一RRC消息包括终端设备第二用户身份的第五RRC消息,第五RRC消息包括NAS消息,这样终端设备能够根据第一RRC消息包括的第五RRC消息确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的NAS消息。即可以通过RRC消息的嵌套确 定NAS消息为哪个用户身份的。In some possible implementations, if the first RRC message includes the fifth RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the fifth RRC message includes the NAS message, the terminal device can determine according to the fifth RRC message included in the first RRC message. The NAS message is the NAS message of the second user identity. That is, the user identity of the NAS message can be determined through the nesting of the RRC message.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的NAS消息为第二用户身份的NAS消息,这样终端设备能够根据第一RRC消息包括的第二指示信息确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的。即可以通过第一RRC消息中显式的指示确定NAS消息为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the NAS message included in the first RRC message is a NAS message with a second user identity, so that the terminal The device can determine that the NAS message is of the second user identity according to the second indication information included in the first RRC message. That is, the explicit indication in the first RRC message can be used to determine whether the NAS message belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,终端设备的不同用户身份的NAS消息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置,终端设备根据NAS消息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息中的位置确定NAS消息为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。协议可以规定网络设备配置终端设备的不同用户身份的NAS消息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置。In some possible implementations, the information elements of the NAS messages of different user identities of the terminal equipment are located in different positions of the first RRC message, and the terminal equipment is based on the information element of the NAS message located in the first RRC message. The location determines whether the NAS message is the identity of the first user or the identity of the second user. The protocol may stipulate that the network device configures the cell in which the NAS message of different user identities of the terminal device is located in different positions of the first RRC message.
第二方面,提供了一种建立无线资源控制RRC连接的方法,其特征在于,包括:网络设备获取配置信息,所述配置信息用于终端设备以第二用户身份建立无线资源控制RRC连接;In a second aspect, a method for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection is provided, which is characterized by comprising: a network device acquiring configuration information, where the configuration information is used by a terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as a second user;
所述网络设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括所述配置信息。The network device sends a first RRC message to a terminal device with a first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
在一些可能的实现方式中,在所述网络设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一RRC消息之前,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, before the network device sends the first RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, the method further includes:
所述网络设备确定所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份。The network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息包括用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的随机接入信道RACH资源、用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI中的至少一种。In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity, and a random access channel RACH resource for the terminal device to use the second user identity. At least one of uplink authorization information for establishing an RRC connection and a temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of a cell used for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection as the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息用于指示所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device as the second user to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括所述终端设备的第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,所述第二RRC消息包括所述配置信息。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes the configuration information.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的配置信息用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used for the terminal device to use the second indication information. The user identity establishes an RRC connection.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括对应关系,所述对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述第对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes a correspondence, the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate different logical channels of the same bearer Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or The correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used by the terminal device to determine the first A user identity or the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息还包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数和所述第二用户身份的密钥信息中的至少一种。In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,若所述配置信息包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数,所 述第二用户身份的协议栈参数为无线链路控制RLC层参数、媒体接入控制MAC层参数或物理PHY层参数中的至少一种时,所述网络设备获取配置信息,包括:In some possible implementations, if the configuration information includes the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity, the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity are radio link control RLC layer parameters, media access control MAC layer When at least one of parameters or physical PHY layer parameters, the network device acquiring configuration information includes:
所述网络设备向分布单元DU发送请求消息,所述请求消息用于请求所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数。The network device sends a request message to the distribution unit DU, where the request message is used to request the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
所述网络设备向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三RRC消息,所述第三RRC消息包括第一寻呼信息,所述第一寻呼信息携带所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的标识。The network device sends a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging information carries the second paging information of the terminal device. The identity of the user.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes:
所述网络设备接收所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送的第四RRC消息,所述第四RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的最小化路测MDT信息;Receiving, by the network device, a fourth RRC message sent by the terminal device of the first user identity, where the fourth RRC message includes the minimized drive test MDT information of the second user identity of the terminal device;
所述网络设备根据所述第四RRC消息确定所述第二用户身份的MDT信息。The network device determines the MDT information of the second user identity according to the fourth RRC message.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息为RRC释放消息或者RRC重配置消息,所述RRC释放消息用于指示释放所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接或者用于指示所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进入RRC非激活态。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device or to Instruct the first user identity of the terminal device to enter the RRC inactive state.
第三方面,本申请提供一种建立RRC连接的装置,包括收发单元和建立单元,收发单元用于以所述第一用户身份从网络设备接收所述第一用户身份的第一无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括配置信息,所述配置信息用于所述装置以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接;建立单元,用于以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接。In a third aspect, the present application provides an apparatus for establishing an RRC connection, including a transceiver unit and an establishment unit, where the transceiver unit is configured to receive the first radio resource control RRC of the first user identity from a network device as the first user identity Message, the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used by the device to establish an RRC connection as the second user; an establishment unit is used to establish an RRC connection as the second user according to the configuration information RRC connection.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息包括用于建立单元以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的随机接入信道RACH资源、用于建立单元以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于建立单元以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI中的至少一种。In some possible implementations, the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource for the establishment unit to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user, and a resource for the establishment unit to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user. At least one of the uplink authorization information and the temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of the cell used for the establishment unit to establish the RRC connection with the identity of the second user.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息用于指示所述装置以所述第二用户身份使用所述装置以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接;In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information is used to instruct the apparatus to use the RRC connection established by the apparatus as the first user as the second user;
建立单元具体用于:根据所述配置信息以所述第二用户身份使用所述装置以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The establishing unit is specifically configured to: use the apparatus to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the first user using the identity of the second user according to the configuration information.
在一些可能的实现方式中,建立单元具体用于:根据所述配置信息以第二用户身份使用所述装置以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,所述装置以第一用户身份能够使用所述装置以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。In some possible implementation manners, the establishing unit is specifically configured to: use the device as the second user to establish the RRC connection as the first user according to the configuration information, and the device can use the RRC connection as the first user as the first user. The RRC connection established by the device as the first user.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括所述装置的所述第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,所述第二RRC消息包括所述配置信息,所述装置还包括:In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the apparatus, the second RRC message includes the configuration information, and the apparatus further includes:
确定单元,用于根据所述第一RRC消息包括的所述第二RRC消息确定所述装置能够以第二用户身份使用所述装置以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The determining unit is configured to determine, according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message, that the device can use the device as the second user identity to establish the RRC connection established with the first user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的所述配置信息用于装置以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接,所述确定单元还用于根据所述第一指示信息确定所述装置能够以第二用户身份使用所述装置以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used by the device to communicate with the second user. The identity establishes an RRC connection, and the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the first indication information, that the device can use the device as the second user to establish the RRC connection with the first user.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述确定单元还用于根据所述配置信息所在的信元在所述 第一RRC消息中的位置确定所述装置能够以第二用户身份使用所述装置以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,所述装置的不同用户身份的配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置。In some possible implementation manners, the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the position of the cell where the configuration information is located in the first RRC message, that the device can use the device as the second user For the RRC connection established by the first user identity, the information elements where the configuration information of the different user identities of the device are located are in different positions of the first RRC message.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括对应关系,所述对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于装置确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes a correspondence, the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate different logical channels of the same bearer Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding The relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the corresponding relationship is used by the device to determine the first user identity or The identity of the second user.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息还包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数和所述第二用户身份的密钥信息中的至少一种。In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于以第一用户身份从所述网络设备接收第三RRC消息,所述第三RRC消息包括第一寻呼信息,所述第一寻呼信息携带所述装置的所述第二用户身份的标识。In some possible implementation manners, the transceiving unit is further configured to receive a third RRC message from the network device as the first user, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging The information carries the identifier of the second user identity of the device.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于在所述以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接之前,以所述第一用户身份向所述网络设备发送第四RRC消息,所述第四RRC消息包括所述装置的所述第二用户身份的最小化路测MDT信息。In some possible implementation manners, the transceiving unit is further configured to send a fourth user identity to the network device as the first user before establishing an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user identity. An RRC message, where the fourth RRC message includes minimized drive test MDT information of the second user identity of the device.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息为RRC释放消息或者RRC重配置消息,所述RRC释放消息用于指示释放所述装置的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接或者用于指示所述装置的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接进入非激活态。In some possible implementations, the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the device or to indicate The RRC connection of the first user identity of the device enters an inactive state.
第四方面,本申请提供一种建立RRC连接的装置,包括:获取单元,用于获取配置信息,所述配置信息用于终端设备以第二用户身份建立无线资源控制RRC连接;收发单元,用于向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括所述配置信息。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides an apparatus for establishing an RRC connection, including: an obtaining unit, configured to obtain configuration information, where the configuration information is used by a terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as a second user; Sending a first RRC message to a terminal device with a first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述装置还包括确定单元,用于在所述向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一RRC消息之前,确定所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份。In some possible implementation manners, the apparatus further includes a determining unit configured to determine that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the first user identity before the first RRC message is sent to the first user identity terminal device. The second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息包括用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的随机接入信道RACH资源、用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI中的至少一种。In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity, and a random access channel RACH resource for the terminal device to use the second user identity. At least one of uplink authorization information for establishing an RRC connection and a temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of a cell used for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection as the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息用于指示所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device as the second user to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括所述终端设备的第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,所述第二RRC消息包括所述配置信息。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes the configuration information.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的配置信息用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used for the terminal device to use the second indication information. The user identity establishes an RRC connection.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息包括对应关系,所述对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述第对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message includes a correspondence, the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate different logical channels of the same bearer Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the first corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or The correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used by the terminal device to determine the first A user identity or the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述配置信息还包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数和所述第二用户身份的密钥信息中的至少一种。In some possible implementation manners, the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,若所述配置信息包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数,所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数为无线链路控制RLC层参数、媒体接入控制MAC层参数或物理PHY层参数中的至少一种时,所述获取单元还用于向分布单元DU发送请求消息,所述请求消息用于请求所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数。In some possible implementations, if the configuration information includes the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity, the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity are radio link control RLC layer parameters, media access control MAC layer When at least one of parameters or physical PHY layer parameters, the acquiring unit is further configured to send a request message to the distribution unit DU, where the request message is used to request the protocol stack parameter of the second user identity.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三RRC消息,所述第三RRC消息包括第一寻呼信息,所述第一寻呼信息携带所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的标识。In some possible implementation manners, the transceiving unit is further configured to send a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging The information carries the identifier of the second user identity of the terminal device.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述收发单元还用于接收所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送的第四RRC消息,所述第四RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的最小化路测MDT信息;In some possible implementation manners, the transceiving unit is further configured to receive a fourth RRC message sent by the terminal device of the first user identity, where the fourth RRC message includes the second user identity of the terminal device Minimize drive test MDT information;
所述确定单元还用于根据所述第四RRC消息确定所述第二用户身份的MDT信息。The determining unit is further configured to determine the MDT information of the second user identity according to the fourth RRC message.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC消息为RRC释放消息或者RRC重配置消息,所述RRC释放消息用于指示释放所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接或者用于指示所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进入RRC非激活态。In some possible implementation manners, the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device or to Instruct the first user identity of the terminal device to enter the RRC inactive state.
第五方面,本申请提供一种用建立RRC连接的装置,该装置包括处理器,用于实现上述第一方面和/或其任意可能的实现方式中描述的方法。所述装置还可以包括存储器,所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器用于实现上述第一方面和/或其任意可能的实现方式中描述的方法。可选地,所述处理器用于存储指令,所述处理器执行所述存储器中存储的指令时,可以实现上述第一方面和/或其任意可能的实现方式中描述的方法。所述装置还可以包括通信接口,所述通信接口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信,示例性的,通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块、管脚或其它类型的通信接口。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a device for establishing an RRC connection. The device includes a processor, configured to implement the method described in the first aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof. The apparatus may further include a memory, which is coupled with the processor, and the processor is configured to implement the method described in the first aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof. Optionally, the processor is configured to store instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions stored in the memory, the method described in the first aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof can be implemented. The device may also include a communication interface for the device to communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the communication interface may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces.
第六方面,本申请提供一种建立RRC连接的装置,该装置包括处理器,用于实现上述第二方面和/或其任意可能的实现方式中描述的方法。所述装置还可以包括存储器,所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器用于实现上述第二方面和/或其任意可能的实现方式中描述的方法。可选地,所述处理器用于存储指令,所述处理器执行所述存储器中存储的指令时,可以实现上述第二方面和/或其任意可能的实现方式中描述的方法。所述装置还可以包括通信接口,所述通信接口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a device for establishing an RRC connection. The device includes a processor, configured to implement the method described in the second aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof. The device may further include a memory, the memory is coupled with the processor, and the processor is configured to implement the method described in the above second aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof. Optionally, the processor is configured to store instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions stored in the memory, the method described in the second aspect and/or any possible implementation manner thereof can be implemented. The device may also include a communication interface, and the communication interface is used for the device to communicate with other devices.
第七方面,本申请提供了一种建立RRC连接的系统,该系统包括上述第四方面提供的装置和第五方面提供的装置;或者In a seventh aspect, this application provides a system for establishing an RRC connection, the system including the device provided in the fourth aspect and the device provided in the fifth aspect; or
该系统包括上述第五方面提供的装置和第六方面提供的装置。The system includes the device provided in the fifth aspect and the device provided in the sixth aspect.
第八方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面及其任意可能的设计中的方法。In an eighth aspect, this application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which computer instructions are stored. When the computer instructions are run on the computer, the computer can execute the methods in the first aspect and any possible designs thereof. .
第九方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第二方面及其任意可能的设计中的方法。In the ninth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which computer instructions are stored. When the computer instructions are executed on the computer, the computer executes the method in the second aspect and any possible designs thereof .
第十方面,本申请提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于执行第一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, this application provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to execute the method in the first aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器耦合。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is coupled with the processor.
进一步可选地,所述芯片还包括通信接口。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于执行第二方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to execute the method in the second aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器耦合。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is coupled with the processor.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面及其任意可能的设计中的方法。In the twelfth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect and any of its possible designs method.
第十三方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第二方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof Methods.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是本申请实施例的通信系统的架构图。Fig. 1 is an architecture diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
图2是本申请实施例提供的应用场景示意图。Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请实施例提供的另一应用场景示意图。Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法示意图。Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例提供的另一建立RRC连接的方法示意图。Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图6是本申请实施例提供的又一建立RRC连接的方法示意图。Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图7是本申请实施例提供的又一建立RRC连接的方法示意图。Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一建立RRC连接的方法示意图。Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图9是本申请实施例提供的又一建立RRC连接的方法示意图。Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of another method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图10是本申请实施例提供的协议栈的示意图。Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图11是本申请实施例提供的另一协议栈的示意图。Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of another protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图12是本申请实施例提供的又一协议栈的示意图。Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of another protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图13是本申请实施例提供的又一协议栈的示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another protocol stack provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图14是本申请实施例提供的传输MDT信息的方法示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting MDT information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图15是本申请实施例提供的上报测量配置的方法示意图。FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a method for reporting a measurement configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图16是本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的装置的示意性框图。FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a device for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图17是本申请实施例提供的另一建立RRC连接的装置的示意性框图。FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of another apparatus for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图18是本申请实施例提供的另一建立RRC连接的装置的示意性框图。FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of another apparatus for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(global system of mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: global system of mobile communication (GSM) system, code division multiple access (CDMA) system, broadband code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRS), long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, the future fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) system or new radio (NR), etc.
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may refer to user equipment, access terminals, user units, user stations, mobile stations, mobile stations, remote stations, remote terminals, mobile equipment, user terminals, terminals, wireless communication equipment, user agents, or User device. The terminal device can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network, or future evolution of the public land mobile network (PLMN) Terminal equipment, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WIFI)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为第五代(the fifth generation,5G)系统,例如,新空口(new radio,NR)中的gNB或传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,例如基带单元(BBU)或分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等。The network device in the embodiment of the present application may be any device with a wireless transceiver function. This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WIFI) system access Point (access point, AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission point, TP) or transmission and reception point (transmission and reception point, TRP), etc., can also be the fifth generation (the fifth generation) , 5G) system, for example, the gNB or transmission point (TRP or TP) in the new radio (NR), one or a group (including multiple antenna panels) antenna panels of the base station in the 5G system, or, It may be a network node that constitutes a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU) or a distributed unit (DU).
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节 点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU). The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). The CU implements some of the functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB. For example, the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and realizes the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and physical (PHY) layer. AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU+AAU. It is understandable that the network device may be a device including one or more of CU nodes, DU nodes, and AAU nodes. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
参见图1,图1是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的架构图。如图1所示,该无线通信系统中可以包括至少一个网络设备101,网络设备101和一个或多个终端设备(例如图1中所示的终端设备102和终端设备103)进行通信。当网络设备发送信号时,网络设备为发射端,终端设备为接收端。反之,当终端设备发送信号时,终端设备为发射端,网络设备为接收端。Referring to FIG. 1, FIG. 1 is an architecture diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1, the wireless communication system may include at least one network device 101, and the network device 101 communicates with one or more terminal devices (for example, the terminal device 102 and the terminal device 103 shown in FIG. 1). When a network device sends a signal, the network device is the transmitter and the terminal device is the receiver. Conversely, when a terminal device sends a signal, the terminal device is the transmitter and the network device is the receiver.
图2示出了本申请实施例的一个应用场景示意图。图2中示出了终端设备支持双卡双待(dual SIM dual standby,DSDS)。DSDS场景下,两张SIM卡共享一个单独的收发机,两个SIM卡可以同时处于空闲模式(idle mode),但当其中一个SIM进行无线信号接收时,另外一个SIM卡不能进行无线信号接收。在空闲模式下,两个SIM卡通过时分方式来保持两个卡的信号监听。当其中一个卡发起呼叫的时候,另外一个卡无法监听信号(也无法发起呼叫或被呼叫),第二个卡的注册是保持的。Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application. Figure 2 shows that the terminal device supports dual SIM dual standby (dual SIM dual standby, DSDS). In the DSDS scenario, two SIM cards share a single transceiver, and the two SIM cards can be in idle mode at the same time, but when one of the SIM cards receives wireless signals, the other SIM card cannot receive wireless signals. In the idle mode, the two SIM cards keep the signal monitoring of the two cards in a time-division manner. When one of the cards initiates a call, the other card cannot monitor the signal (also cannot initiate a call or be called), and the registration of the second card is maintained.
图3示出了本申请另一个应用场景示意图。图3中示出了终端设备支持双卡双激活(dual SIM dual active,DSDA),每个SIM卡有单独的收发机,不互相依赖,两个SIM卡可以同时处于空闲模式或者连接模式(connect model)。Figure 3 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of the present application. Figure 3 shows that the terminal device supports dual SIM dual active (DSDA). Each SIM card has a separate transceiver and does not depend on each other. The two SIM cards can be in idle mode or connected mode at the same time. model).
需要说明的是,图2和图3中的两个SIM卡可以属于同一个运营商也可以属于不同的运营商,本申请实施例对此不作任何限定。It should be noted that the two SIM cards in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 may belong to the same operator or may belong to different operators, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
为了便于理解图2和图3中仅示出了两个SIM卡的场景,实际应用中一个终端设备可以支持多个SIM卡,因此,与2和图3中的两个SIM卡不应该造成对本申请实施例的任何限制。In order to facilitate the understanding of the scenario where only two SIM cards are shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3, one terminal device can support multiple SIM cards in practical applications. Therefore, the two SIM cards in Figure 2 and Figure 3 should not cause any damage to the cost. Any limitations of the application examples.
本申请实施例中,“用户身份”(例如第一用户身份或第二用户身份等)为逻辑概念。例如,“用户身份”可以对应SIM卡或签约用户信息或虚拟SIM卡或用户标识(如国际移动用户标识(international mobile subscriber identity,IMSI)或临时移动用户标识(temporary mobile subscriber identity,TMSI)等)。从网络侧的角度来看,不同的“用户身份”在逻辑上对应网络侧服务的不同通信实体,例如一个支持两个用户身份的终端设备,对于网络侧来说,可以看作两个通信实体或者看作两个UE。再例如,“用户身份”对应SIM卡或签约用户信息时,网络设备会将支持不同SIM卡或不同签约用户信息的两个终端设备识别为两个不同的通信实体,也会将支持多个不同SIM卡或多个签约用户信息的同一终端设备识别为多个不同的通信实体,即使在实际上,支持多个不同SIM卡或多个签约用户信息的终端设备只是一个物理实体。本申请实施例中将主要以“用户身份”对应SIM卡为例进行说明。In the embodiment of the present application, "user identity" (for example, the first user identity or the second user identity, etc.) is a logical concept. For example, "user identity" can correspond to SIM card or subscriber information or virtual SIM card or user identity (such as international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) or temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI), etc.) . From the perspective of the network side, different "user identities" logically correspond to different communication entities served by the network side. For example, a terminal device that supports two user identities can be regarded as two communication entities on the network side. Or as two UEs. For another example, when the "user identity" corresponds to the SIM card or subscriber information, the network device will recognize two terminal devices that support different SIM cards or different subscriber information as two different communication entities, and will also support multiple different communication entities. The same terminal device with SIM card or multiple subscriber information is identified as multiple different communication entities, even in reality, the terminal device supporting multiple different SIM cards or multiple subscriber information is just one physical entity. In the embodiments of the present application, description will be made mainly by taking the "user identity" corresponding to the SIM card as an example.
示例性地,SIM卡可以理解为终端设备接入移动网络的钥匙,为了便于描述,本申请实施例中将SIM卡以及其演进都统称为SIM卡。例如SIM卡可以是全球移动通信系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM)数字移动电话用户的身份识别卡,用于存储用户的身份识别码和密钥,并支持GSM系统对用户的鉴权;又例如,SIM卡也可以是全球用户识别卡(universal subscriber identity module,USIM),也可以称为升级SIM卡。Exemplarily, the SIM card can be understood as the key for the terminal device to access the mobile network. For ease of description, the SIM card and its evolution are collectively referred to as the SIM card in the embodiments of the present application. For example, the SIM card can be an identification card for a user of a global system for mobile communications (GSM) digital mobile phone, which is used to store the user's identification code and key, and supports the authentication of the user by the GSM system; and For example, the SIM card may also be a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), which may also be referred to as an upgraded SIM card.
在下文中,将终端设备安装一个SIM卡,认为是终端设备支持一个用户身份,例如,安装两个SIM卡的终端设备,就可以支持两个用户身份,可以理解为,SIM卡和用户身份是一一对应的关系。本文主要是以终端设备支持两个用户身份为例,这两个用户身份分别称为第一用户身份和第二用户身份。其中,第一用户身份可以理解为,是终端设备安装了SIM卡1后具有的用户身份,第二用户身份可以理解为,是终端设备安装了SIM卡2后具有的用户身份。而在其它可能的实施例中,如果终端设备安装两个以上的SIM卡,则终端设备也就支持两个以上的用户身份,例如终端设备支持三个用户身份、四个用户身份或更多的用户身份,并可以注册在一个或多个网络中,其中每个用户身份可以注册在一个网络中。本申请实施例将主要基于终端设备支持两个用户身份进行描述,当终端设备支持两个以上的用户身份时,其具体实现可以参照终端设备支持两个用户身份的相关描述,可能需要做一些简单的适配,但是也在本申请实施例的保护范围内。In the following, the terminal device is installed with a SIM card, which is considered to be that the terminal device supports one user identity. For example, a terminal device with two SIM cards installed can support two user identities. It can be understood that the SIM card and the user identity are one. One corresponding relationship. This article mainly takes the terminal device supporting two user identities as an example. The two user identities are called the first user identity and the second user identity respectively. Among them, the first user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 1 is installed, and the second user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 2 is installed. In other possible embodiments, if more than two SIM cards are installed in the terminal device, the terminal device also supports more than two user identities. For example, the terminal device supports three user identities, four user identities, or more. User identity can be registered in one or more networks, and each user identity can be registered in one network. The embodiments of this application will mainly be described based on the terminal device supporting two user identities. When the terminal device supports more than two user identities, the specific implementation can refer to the related description of the terminal device supporting two user identities, and some simple things may be required. However, it is also within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
其中,当终端设备的用户身份为第一用户身份时,从网络设备的角度来看,终端设备可以理解为一个用户(从协议的角度来看,就是一个终端设备,例如,称为第一用户);当终端设备的用户身份为第二用户身份时,从网络设备的角度来看,终端设备可以理解为又一个用户(例如,称为第二用户)。终端设备可以以第一用户身份注册在第一网络,以及以第二用户身份注册在第二网络。本申请实施例中,终端设备支持一个用户身份,也可以描述为,终端设备具有一个用户身份。同理,终端设备支持两个用户身份,也可以描述为,终端设备具有两个用户身份。Among them, when the user identity of the terminal device is the first user identity, from the perspective of the network device, the terminal device can be understood as a user (from the perspective of the protocol, it is a terminal device, for example, called the first user ); When the user identity of the terminal device is the second user identity, from the perspective of the network device, the terminal device can be understood as another user (for example, referred to as the second user). The terminal device can be registered in the first network as the first user and registered in the second network as the second user. In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device supports one user identity, which can also be described as the terminal device having one user identity. In the same way, the terminal device supports two user identities, which can also be described as the terminal device having two user identities.
另外需要说明的是,在本申请的各个实施例中所述的,“第一用户身份的终端设备”,可以理解为,“终端设备的第一用户身份”,这两种描述方式所指示的内容是相同的,这两种描述方式可以互换。同理,“第二用户身份的终端设备”,可以理解为,“终端设备的第二用户身份”,这两种描述方式所指示的内容是相同的,这两种描述方式可以互换。In addition, it should be noted that in the various embodiments of the present application, the "terminal device with the first user identity" can be understood as "the first user identity of the terminal device", as indicated by these two descriptions. The content is the same, and the two descriptions can be interchanged. In the same way, "the terminal device of the second user identity" can be understood as "the second user identity of the terminal device". The content indicated by the two description methods is the same, and the two description methods can be interchanged.
在图2和图3场景下,终端设备支持的两个用户身份需要主动发起呼叫时,首先要建立两个用户身份的RRC连接,然后利用建立好的RRC连接传输数据;终端设备支持的两个用户身份被呼叫时,网络设备会给终端设备发送一个或两个用户身份的寻呼信息,终端设备接收寻呼信息后,终端设备建立一个或两个用户身份的RRC连接,然后利用建立好的RRC连接传输数据。In the scenarios shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3, when the two user identities supported by the terminal device need to initiate a call actively, the RRC connection of the two user identities must be established first, and then the established RRC connection is used to transmit data; the two user identities supported by the terminal device When the user identity is called, the network device will send one or two user identity paging information to the terminal device. After the terminal device receives the paging information, the terminal device establishes one or two user identity RRC connections, and then uses the established RRC connection transmits data.
下面结合图4描述UE在空闲(RRC_IDLE)态发起建立RRC连接的过程(该过程中的随机接入过程是基于竞争的随机接入过程。),图4以终端设备为UE,网络设备为基站进行描述,建立RRC连接的过程包括以下步骤:The following describes the process in which the UE initiates the establishment of an RRC connection in the idle (RRC_IDLE) state with reference to Figure 4 (the random access process in this process is a contention-based random access process.), Figure 4 uses the terminal device as the UE and the network device as the base station To describe, the process of establishing an RRC connection includes the following steps:
S410,UE根据随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)资源向基站发送随机接入前导码(preamble)。S410: The UE sends a random access preamble (preamble) to the base station according to a random access channel (RACH) resource.
例如,RACH资源可以包括随机接入前导索引(随机接入前导索引用于指示随机接入前导)和/或随机接入资源对应的掩码索引(mask index),该掩码索引用于指示发送随机接入前导的时频资源。For example, the RACH resource may include a random access preamble index (a random access preamble index is used to indicate a random access preamble) and/or a mask index corresponding to the random access resource, and the mask index is used to indicate transmission Random access preamble time-frequency resources.
S420,基站向UE发送随机接入响应(random access response,RAR),RAR携带上行授权信息、临时小区无线网络临时标识(temporary cell radio network temporary identifier,T-CRNTI)、时间提前量(timing advance,TA)中的至少一种。S420. The base station sends a random access response (RAR) to the UE. The RAR carries uplink authorization information, a temporary cell radio network temporary identifier (T-CRNTI), and a timing advance (T-CRNTI). At least one of TA).
其中,上行授权信息用于指示发送RRC连接建立请求的资源,例如上行授权信息包 括UE发送RRC连接建立请求所使用的频域资源、时域资源以及调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme,MCS)等信息。TA用于UE获知上行定时。Among them, the uplink authorization information is used to indicate the resources for sending the RRC connection establishment request. For example, the uplink authorization information includes the frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and modulation and coding scheme (MCS) used by the UE to send the RRC connection establishment request. And other information. TA is used for UE to learn uplink timing.
S430,UE在上行授权信息指示的资源上向基站发送RRC连接建立请求(RRC connection request或RRC set up request)消息。S430: The UE sends an RRC connection establishment request (RRC connection request or RRC set up request) message to the base station on the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information.
其中,RRC连接建立请求是通过信令无线承载0(signalling radio bearer 0,SRB0)来传输的。SRB0是使用公共控制信道(common control channel,CCCH)逻辑信道来传输RRC消息。Among them, the RRC connection establishment request is transmitted through signaling radio bearer 0 (SRB0). SRB0 uses a common control channel (CCCH) logical channel to transmit RRC messages.
S440,基站接收到RRC连接建立请求之后,向UE发送RRC连接建立(RRC connection setup或RRC setup)消息,RRC连接建立消息中包括UE的配置信息。S440: After receiving the RRC connection establishment request, the base station sends an RRC connection setup (RRC connection setup or RRC setup) message to the UE, where the RRC connection setup message includes the configuration information of the UE.
其中,配置信息包括信令无线承载1(Signalling Radio Bearer 1,SRB1)对应的协议栈参数,该配置信息用于UE和基站之间交互后续的RRC消息。RRC连接建立消息用于建立SRB1。SRB1是使用专用控制信道(dedicated control channel,DCCH)来传输RRC消息。协议栈参数包括分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol control,PDCP)层参数、RLC层参数、MAC层参数和PHY层参数中的至少一种的参数。The configuration information includes protocol stack parameters corresponding to Signaling Radio Bearer 1 (Signalling Radio Bearer 1, SRB1), and the configuration information is used to exchange subsequent RRC messages between the UE and the base station. The RRC connection establishment message is used to establish SRB1. SRB1 uses a dedicated control channel (dedicated control channel, DCCH) to transmit RRC messages. The protocol stack parameters include at least one of packet data convergence protocol control (PDCP) layer parameters, RLC layer parameters, MAC layer parameters, and PHY layer parameters.
可选地,在S440之前,基站可以先向UE发送一个竞争冲突解决标识的信息。该信息携带了之前UE发送的RRC建立请求消息的比特信息(比如之前发送的RRC建立请求消息超过了48bit,则竞争冲突解决标识的信息就只携带最前面的48比特,或者之前发送的RRC连接请求消息不超过48bit,则竞争冲突解决标识的信息携带全部的RRC建立请求消息),这样UE收到该信息之后就可以和之前自身发送的RRC建立请求消息的信息比较,如果竞争冲突解决标示的信息是属于自己发送的RRC建立请求消息的内容,则认为基站已经接收到该UE的RRC建立请求消息,从而随机接入过程成功完成。Optionally, before S440, the base station may first send a contention conflict resolution identification information to the UE. This information carries the bit information of the RRC establishment request message sent by the UE before (for example, the RRC establishment request message sent before exceeds 48 bits, and the contention conflict resolution identification information only carries the first 48 bits, or the RRC connection sent before. The request message does not exceed 48 bits, then the contention conflict resolution identification information carries all the RRC establishment request messages), so that after receiving the information, the UE can compare with the information of the RRC establishment request message sent by itself before, if the contention conflict resolution flag is If the information belongs to the content of the RRC establishment request message sent by itself, it is considered that the base station has received the RRC establishment request message of the UE, and the random access process is successfully completed.
S450,UE根据配置信息配置协议栈参数之后,向基站发送RRC连接建立完成(RRC connection setup complete)消息,用于指示已经完成建立RRC连接。S450: After configuring the protocol stack parameters according to the configuration information, the UE sends an RRC connection setup complete (RRC connection setup complete) message to the base station to indicate that the RRC connection has been established.
进一步地,RRC连接建立完成消息中可以包括非接入层(non-access,NAS)消息,基站将NAS消息透传给核心网。Further, the RRC connection establishment complete message may include a non-access stratum (non-access, NAS) message, and the base station transparently transmits the NAS message to the core network.
RRC连接建立过程主要目的是建立SRB1,以及将UE侧的NAS消息发送给网络侧。在S450之后。基站可以根据UE的业务要求为UE配置数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)对应的配置信息。DRB用于定义无线接口Uu中数据包的处理策略。DRB用于传输数据包。DRB对应的配置信息包括DRB对应的协议栈参数。DRB对应的协议栈参数包括业务数据适应协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层参数、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol control,PDCP)层参数、RLC层参数、MAC层参数和PHY层参数中的至少一种的参数。The main purpose of the RRC connection establishment process is to establish SRB1 and send the NAS message on the UE side to the network side. After S450. The base station can configure the configuration information corresponding to the data radio bearer (DRB) for the UE according to the service requirements of the UE. DRB is used to define the processing strategy of data packets in the wireless interface Uu. DRB is used to transmit data packets. The configuration information corresponding to the DRB includes protocol stack parameters corresponding to the DRB. The protocol stack parameters corresponding to DRB include service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer parameters, packet data convergence protocol control (PDCP) layer parameters, RLC layer parameters, MAC layer parameters, and PHY layer parameters. At least one of the parameters.
在RRC连接建立过程之后,基站和UE之间会进行接入层的安全激活,即交互安全模式命令过程。基站给UE发送安全模式命令消息,UE再给基站发送安全模式完成消息。其中安全模式命令消息中携带了加密算法和完整性保护算法。UE收到安全模式命令消息之后,会推导出密钥K gNB或K eNB。UE再根据该密钥K gNB或K eNB推导出RRC信令进行完整性保护的安全密钥,RRC信令进行加密的安全密钥,用户数据的完整性保护的安全密钥,用户数据的加密的安全密钥。具体推导算法可以参考协议3GPP 33.501或33.401。 After the RRC connection establishment process, security activation of the access layer will be performed between the base station and the UE, that is, an interactive security mode command process. The base station sends a safety mode command message to the UE, and the UE sends a safety mode complete message to the base station. The security mode command message carries an encryption algorithm and an integrity protection algorithm. After receiving the security mode command message, the UE derives the key K gNB or K eNB . The UE then derives the security key for integrity protection of RRC signaling based on the key K gNB or K eNB , the security key for encryption of RRC signaling, the security key for integrity protection of user data, and the encryption of user data. Security key. The specific derivation algorithm can refer to the protocol 3GPP 33.501 or 33.401.
通常情况下,除了在图4的空闲(RRC_IDLE)态发起随机接入过程,在以下五种情 况下也需要发起随机接入过程:Normally, in addition to initiating the random access process in the idle (RRC_IDLE) state of Figure 4, the random access process also needs to be initiated in the following five situations:
情况一,RRC连接重建过程(RRC Connection Re-establishment procedure),以便UE在无线链路失败(radio link failure)后重建无线连接。或者UE从RRC_INACTIVE态发起RRC恢复过程(RRC Resume procedure),以便UE给基站发送一些信息(比如UE进入RRC_CONNECTED态时的数据传输)。该两种场景和UE在RRC_IDLE态建立RRC的过程类似。UE发送随机接入前导并接收基站发送的随机接入响应,随机接入响应中携带的上行授权信息携带的指示UE发送RRC重建请求(RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest或RRCReestablishmentRequest)消息或RRC恢复请求(RRCConnectionResumeRequest或RRCResumeRequest)消息的资源。之后UE再发送RRC重建请求或RRC恢复请求消息并接收基站发送的RRC重建消息(RRCConnectionReestablishment或RRCReestablishment)或RRC恢复消息(RRCConnectionResume或RRCResume)。最后UE再发送RRC重建完成消息(RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete或RRCReestablishmentComplete)或RRC恢复完成消息(RRCConnectionResumeComplete或RRCResumeComplete)。这些过程是为了UE建立SRB或/和DRB。Case 1, RRC Connection Re-establishment procedure, so that the UE reestablishes the wireless connection after the radio link failure. Or the UE initiates an RRC Resume procedure from the RRC_INACTIVE state, so that the UE sends some information to the base station (for example, data transmission when the UE enters the RRC_CONNECTED state). The two scenarios are similar to the process of the UE establishing RRC in the RRC_IDLE state. The UE sends a random access preamble and receives a random access response sent by the base station. The uplink grant information carried in the random access response indicates that the UE sends an RRC reestablishment request (RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest or RRCReestablishmentRequest) message or an RRC recovery request (RRCConnectionResumeRequest or RRCResumeRequest) message Resources. After that, the UE sends an RRC reestablishment request or an RRC resume request message and receives an RRC reestablishment message (RRCConnectionReestablishment or RRCReestablishment) or an RRC resume message (RRCConnectionResume or RRCResume) sent by the base station. Finally, the UE sends an RRC reestablishment complete message (RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete or RRCReestablishmentComplete) or an RRC reestablishment complete message (RRCConnectionResumeComplete or RRCResumeComplete). These procedures are for the UE to establish SRB or/and DRB.
情况二,切换(handover)过程,切换后UE需要与新的小区建立上行同步。The second situation is a handover process. After the handover, the UE needs to establish uplink synchronization with a new cell.
情况三,RRC连接(RRC_CONNECTED)态下,下行数据到达(此时需要回复ACK/NACK)时,上行处于“不同步”状态。Case 3: In the RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state, when the downlink data arrives (the ACK/NACK needs to be replied at this time), the uplink is in the "unsynchronized" state.
情况四,RRC连接态下,上行数据到达(例:需要上报测量报告或发送用户数据)时,并且UE需要上报缓冲状态报告(buffer status reporting,BSR)时,如果没有上行资源可用于上行数据传输或者当前可用于上行数据传输的上行资源不满足时,则触发调度请求(scheduling request,SR)。SR用于请求上行资源。如果上行没有可用的PUCCH资源用于调度请求,此时UE发起随机接入过程,来请求基站调度UE进行上行数据。Case 4: In the RRC connection state, when the uplink data arrives (for example, it needs to report a measurement report or send user data), and the UE needs to report a buffer status report (buffer status report, BSR), if there is no uplink resource available for uplink data transmission Or when the uplink resources currently available for uplink data transmission are not satisfied, a scheduling request (scheduling request, SR) is triggered. SR is used to request uplink resources. If there is no PUCCH resource available for the scheduling request in the uplink, the UE initiates a random access procedure to request the base station to schedule the UE for uplink data.
情况五,RRC连接态下,UE进行波束beam管理。当UE检测到beam信号质量低于一定的门限时,UE会选择其他beam进行随机接入,通知基站更换对应的beam。Case 5: In the RRC connected state, the UE performs beam management. When the UE detects that the beam signal quality is below a certain threshold, the UE will select other beams for random access and notify the base station to change the corresponding beam.
当UE已经处于RRC_CONNECTED态时需要发起竞争的随机接入过程时(比如以上的情况二、三、四、五),需要执行以上的S410和S420,之后UE发送一个携带小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier,C-RNTI)的MAC控制元素。之后,如果UE收到了用该C-RNTI进行加扰的PDCCH,则认为当前随机接入过程成功。When the UE is already in the RRC_CONNECTED state and needs to initiate a competing random access process (such as the above cases two, three, four, and five), the above S410 and S420 need to be performed, and then the UE sends a cell radio network temporary identification (cell Radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) MAC control element. After that, if the UE receives the PDCCH scrambled with the C-RNTI, it is considered that the current random access procedure is successful.
对于以上的情况一中的RRC重建过程中,基站会在RRC重建消息中携带更新密钥的参数。For the RRC reconstruction process in the above case 1, the base station will carry the parameter for updating the key in the RRC reconstruction message.
另外,以上中提到的随机接入过程一般称为4步随机接入过程。目前也提出了一种2步随机接入过程。2步随机接入过程是指UE在发送随机接入前导码之后,无需等收到基站发送随机接入响应之后才发送RRC连接建立请求消息或RRC重建请求消息或RRC恢复请求消息或携带C-RNTI的MAC控制元素(即可以在收到随机接入响应之前就可以发送以上信息),之后基站会给UE发送响应信息,该响应信息可以是指示UE随机接入成功或指示UE回退到正常的随机接入(即UE后续再直接发送RRC连接建立请求消息或RRC重建请求消息或RRC恢复请求消息或携带C-RNTI的MAC控制元素)或指示UE推迟一段时间再进行2步随机接入。In addition, the random access process mentioned above is generally called a 4-step random access process. At present, a 2-step random access procedure is also proposed. The 2-step random access process means that after the UE sends the random access preamble, it does not need to wait for the base station to send the random access response before sending the RRC connection establishment request message or the RRC reestablishment request message or the RRC recovery request message or carrying C- The MAC control element of RNTI (that is, the above information can be sent before the random access response is received), and then the base station will send response information to the UE. The response information can indicate that the UE has succeeded in random access or that the UE has returned to normal Random access (that is, the UE directly sends an RRC connection establishment request message or an RRC reestablishment request message or an RRC recovery request message or a MAC control element carrying C-RNTI) or instructs the UE to postpone a period of time before performing 2-step random access.
终端设备支持多个用户身份(也可以理解为终端设备支持多个SIM),终端设备在建立RRC连接过程中需要发起竞争或者非竞争的随机接入,对于竞争的随机接入,由于资源有限终端设备需要为多个用户身份竞争资源导致随机接入的时延增加,甚至会导致随机接入失败的情况,从而导致传输性能下降;对于非竞争的随机接入,多个用户身份终端设备的需要占用较多的随机接入资源,会增加随机接入的资源开销。并且不管是竞争的随机接入还是非竞争的随机接入,随机接入的过程也会增加建立RRC连接的时延。以图4为例,对于竞争的随机接入,终端设备需要为两个用户身份(两个用户身份都为RRC_IDLE态)竞争随机接入资源(如为RACH资源),信令开销大,时延较长。具体来说,在S410之前,终端设备都需要为两个用户身份抢占RACH资源,利用RACH资源发送preamble,很有可能终端设备为某一个用户身份抢占不到资源,导致随机接入失败的情况;或者该终端设备的一个用户身份和其他终端设备的用户身份可能使用相同的RACH资源进行接入,这样基站无法区分哪些用户身份需要接入,可能导致基站无法检测到随机接入前导,这样采用相同的RACH资源的两个用户身份就需要重新发送随机接入前导,导致随机接入时延增加。或者基站在相同的RACH资源上检测到了同一个随机接入前导,但基站只会发送一个随机接入响应,这样两个用户身份都会按照随机接入响应中的上行授权信息发送RRC建立请求消息,但基站只会给一个用户身份发送竞争冲突解决标识的信息(即携带其中一个用户身份发送的RRC建立请求消息的比特信息),另外一个用户身份就认为冲突解决失败,后续再重新发送随机接入前导,从而该用户身份的接入时延就会增加。The terminal device supports multiple user identities (it can also be understood that the terminal device supports multiple SIMs). The terminal device needs to initiate competitive or non-competitive random access during the establishment of an RRC connection. For competing random access, due to limited resources, the terminal Devices need to compete for resources for multiple user identities, which will increase the delay of random access, and even cause random access failures, resulting in a decrease in transmission performance; for non-competitive random access, multiple user identities are required for terminal equipment Occupying more random access resources will increase the resource overhead of random access. In addition, whether it is competitive random access or non-competitive random access, the process of random access will also increase the delay in establishing the RRC connection. Taking Figure 4 as an example, for competing random access, the terminal device needs to compete for random access resources (such as RACH resources) for two user identities (both user identities are in the RRC_IDLE state), which results in high signaling overhead and delay Longer. Specifically, before S410, the terminal device needs to preempt RACH resources for two user identities and use the RACH resource to send the preamble. It is very likely that the terminal device cannot preempt resources for a certain user identity, resulting in random access failure; Or a user identity of the terminal device and user identities of other terminal devices may use the same RACH resource for access, so the base station cannot distinguish which user identities need to be accessed, which may cause the base station to fail to detect the random access preamble, so the same The two user identities of the RACH resource need to re-send the random access preamble, which leads to an increase in the random access delay. Or the base station detects the same random access preamble on the same RACH resource, but the base station will only send one random access response, so that both user identities will send the RRC establishment request message according to the uplink authorization information in the random access response. However, the base station will only send the contention conflict resolution identification information to one user identity (that is, carry the bit information of the RRC establishment request message sent by one user identity), and the other user identity will consider that the conflict resolution has failed, and then resend random access. Preamble, so that the access delay of the user identity will increase.
下面结合图5至图15描述本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法。The method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application will be described below in conjunction with FIG. 5 to FIG. 15.
图5示出了本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法500,方法500包括:FIG. 5 shows a method 500 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 500 includes:
S510,网络设备获取配置信息,配置信息用于辅助终端设备以第二用户身份建立RRC连接。S510: The network device obtains configuration information, and the configuration information is used to assist the terminal device in establishing an RRC connection as the second user.
网络设备可以为终端设备的第二用户身份生成配置信息,The network device can generate configuration information for the second user identity of the terminal device,
网络设备还可以从其他的网络设备获取配置信息。比如通过网络设备之间的Xn或X2接口从其他的网络设备获取配置信息。比如第一用户身份对应的网络设备向第二用户身份对应的网络设备发送请求消息,然后第二用户身份对应的网络设备向第一用户身份对应的网络设备发送该配置信息。The network device can also obtain configuration information from other network devices. For example, the configuration information is obtained from other network devices through the Xn or X2 interface between the network devices. For example, the network device corresponding to the first user identity sends a request message to the network device corresponding to the second user identity, and then the network device corresponding to the second user identity sends the configuration information to the network device corresponding to the first user identity.
例如,在CU-DU架构下,第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以属于同一个CU,但属于不同的DU,网络设备可以为CU,若配置信息包括第二用户身份的协议栈参数为无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层参数、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层参数或物理(physical,PHY)层参数中的至少一种,由于第二用户身份的RLC层参数、MAC层参数和PHY层参数由DU分配的,因此,CU需要向DU发送请求消息,请求消息用于请求第二用户身份的RLC层参数、MAC层参数和PHY层参数。第二用户身份的DU向CU返回第二用户身份的RLC层参数、MAC层参数和PHY层参数中的至少一种的参数。例如CU可以将该请求消息通过一个非UE级别的接口向第二用户身份的DU发送。又例如,该请求消息可以为建立F1接口消息,该建立F1接口消息用户建立CU与第二用户身份的DU之间的F1接口。或者当第一用户身份和第二用户身份对应的DU相同时,通过CU与DU之间的第一用户身份对应的F1接口消息请求DU分配对应的配置信息(可选的,该接口消息中还携带了小区标识,用于指示请求DU中哪个小区分配对应的配置信 息)。For example, under the CU-DU architecture, the first user identity and the second user identity can belong to the same CU but belong to different DUs. The network device can be a CU. If the configuration information includes the second user identity, the protocol stack parameter is wireless At least one of radio link control (RLC) layer parameters, media access control (MAC) layer parameters, or physical (PHY) layer parameters, due to the RLC layer parameters of the second user identity The MAC layer parameters and PHY layer parameters are allocated by the DU. Therefore, the CU needs to send a request message to the DU. The request message is used to request the RLC layer parameters, MAC layer parameters and PHY layer parameters of the second user identity. The DU of the second user identity returns to the CU at least one parameter of the RLC layer parameter, the MAC layer parameter, and the PHY layer parameter of the second user identity. For example, the CU may send the request message to the DU of the second user identity through a non-UE-level interface. For another example, the request message may be an F1 interface establishment message, and the F1 interface establishment message is for the user to establish an F1 interface between the CU and the DU of the second user identity. Or when the DU corresponding to the first user identity and the second user identity are the same, the DU is requested to allocate the corresponding configuration information through the F1 interface message corresponding to the first user identity between the CU and the DU (optionally, the interface message also includes It carries the cell identifier, which is used to indicate which cell in the DU is requested to allocate the corresponding configuration information).
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以有相同的服务网元,也可以有不同的服务网元,例如,S510中的网络设备可以为基站,该基站可以是第一用户身份和第二用户身份共同的服务基站,该基站也可以是第一用户身份的服务基站,该基站可以从第二用户身份的服务基站获取第二用户身份的配置信息。It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, the first user identity and the second user identity may have the same service network element or different service network elements. For example, the network device in S510 may be a base station. The base station may be a serving base station sharing the first user identity and the second user identity, the base station may also be a serving base station of the first user identity, and the base station may obtain configuration information of the second user identity from the serving base station of the second user identity.
S520,网络设备向终端设备发送第一用户身份的第一RRC消息,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息包括配置信息。S520: The network device sends a first RRC message of the first user identity to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the network device, where the first RRC message includes configuration information.
可选地,第一RRC消息可以是RRC释放消息或RRC重配(RRC reconfiguration)消息。例如,RRC释放消息用于指示终端设备释放第一用户身份的RRC连接,相应地,网络设备可以释放第一用户身份的业务数据连接和RRC连接。可选地,RRC释放消息用于指示终端设备暂停第一用户身份的RRC连接或者指示终端设备的第一用户身份的业务数据连接进入非激活(inactive)态,相应地,网络设备可以暂停第一用户身份的业务数据连接和RRC连接。可选地,RRC重配消息用于指示终端设备可以保持第一用户身份的业务数据连接和RRC连接,相应地,网络设备可以保持第一用户身份的业务数据连接和RRC连接。Optionally, the first RRC message may be an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration (RRC reconfiguration) message. For example, the RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to release the RRC connection of the first user identity, and accordingly, the network device can release the service data connection and the RRC connection of the first user identity. Optionally, the RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to suspend the RRC connection of the first user identity or to indicate that the service data connection of the first user identity of the terminal device enters an inactive state. Accordingly, the network device can suspend the first user identity. The service data connection and RRC connection of the user identity. Optionally, the RRC reconfiguration message is used to indicate that the terminal device can maintain the service data connection and the RRC connection of the first user identity, and accordingly, the network device can maintain the service data connection and the RRC connection of the first user identity.
可选地,在S520之前,网络设备确定终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份。网络设备只有确定了终端设备是支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的,才可以将用于辅助终端设备以第二用户身份建立RRC连接的配置信息通过第一用户身份的第一RRC消息发送。Optionally, before S520, the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity. Only when the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, can it send the configuration information for assisting the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity through the first RRC message of the first user identity .
具体地,网络设备可以通过以下至少一种方式确定终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份:Specifically, the network device may determine that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity through at least one of the following methods:
方式一,网络设备接收来自核心网设备的寻呼所述第二用户身份的终端设备寻呼信息,该寻呼信息携带第一用户身份的接口标识,例如接口标识包括第一用户身份在NG口或者S1口的控制面接口标识。其中,NG口是基站和5G核心网5GC之间的接口,S1是基站和4G核心网EPC之间的接口。网络设备可以根据寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备的寻呼信息中携带有第一用户身份的接口标识确定终端设备同时支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份。Manner 1: The network device receives the paging information of the terminal device paging the second user identity from the core network device. The paging information carries the interface identity of the first user identity. For example, the interface identity includes that the first user identity is on the NG port. Or the control plane interface identification of the S1 port. Among them, the NG port is the interface between the base station and the 5G core network 5GC, and the S1 is the interface between the base station and the 4G core network EPC. The network device may determine that the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity according to the interface identity of the first user identity carried in the paging information of the terminal device paging the second user identity.
方式二,网络设备接收核心网设备通过第一用户身份的接口发送的消息(例如,可以为NG口消息或者S1口消息)中携带寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备的寻呼信息,网络设备可以根据通过第一用户身份的接口发送的消息中携带有寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备确定终端设备同时支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份。Manner 2: The network device receives a message (for example, an NG port message or an S1 port message) sent by the core network device through the interface of the first user identity and carries the paging information for paging the terminal device of the second user identity, and the network device It may be determined that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity at the same time according to the message sent through the interface of the first user identity that carries the terminal device that pages the second user identity.
方式三,终端设备可以主动向网络设备发送指示终端设备同时支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的指示信息,网络设备可以根据指示信息确定终端设备同时支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份。可选的,该指示信息还可能携带第二用户身份对应小区的标识(物理小区标识或全局小区标识)。例如,网络设备向终端设备发送寻呼第二用户身份的寻呼信息,终端设备接收到寻呼第二用户身份的寻呼信息之后,终端设备主动向网络设备发送指示信息。或者终端设备主动要发起第二用户身份的RRC连接建立时,终端设备主动向网络设备发送指示信息。Manner 3: The terminal device may actively send to the network device indication information indicating that the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity, and the network device may determine that the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity according to the indication information. Optionally, the indication information may also carry the identity of the cell corresponding to the second user identity (physical cell identity or global cell identity). For example, the network device sends paging information for paging the second user identity to the terminal device, and after the terminal device receives the paging information for paging the second user identity, the terminal device actively sends indication information to the network device. Or when the terminal device actively initiates the establishment of the RRC connection with the second user identity, the terminal device actively sends the indication information to the network device.
S530,终端设备以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接。S530: The terminal device uses the identity of the second user to establish an RRC connection according to the configuration information.
需要说明的是,S530可以有以下至少一种理解方式:It should be noted that S530 can be understood in at least one of the following ways:
a),终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备根据配置信息以第二用户身份继承第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,此时配置信息用于指示终端设备以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,这样终端设备不用以第二用户身份发起随机接入,也不需要以第二用户身份再发送RRC建立请求消息来建立RRC连接,这样可以避免终端设备还需要为第二用户身份执行一遍图4中步骤S410-S450造成的信令开销,并且也能降低终端设备发起第二用户身份的随机接入时延。a) The establishment of an RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user based on the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device inherits the RRC connection established by the first user as the second user according to the configuration information, and the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device to The second user identity uses the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, so that the terminal device does not need to initiate random access as the second user identity, nor does it need to send the RRC establishment request message as the second user identity to establish the RRC connection. In this way, the signaling overhead caused by the terminal device needing to perform steps S410-S450 in FIG. 4 for the second user identity can be avoided, and the random access delay for the terminal device to initiate the second user identity can also be reduced.
具体地,配置信息用于指示终端设备以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接具体可以为:配置信息用于指示终端设备以第二用户身份使用终端设备的第一用户身份的SRB1、SRB2和密钥中的至少一项。Specifically, the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the terminal device as the second user. The RRC connection established as the first user may specifically be: the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the first user of the terminal device as the second user. At least one of the SRB1, SRB2, and key of the identity.
进一步地,在a)中,配置信息可以包括第二用户身份的无线配置信息。无线配置信息包括协议栈参数(比如SRB1的协议栈参数)和/或第二用户身份的密钥信息(密钥信息可以包括第二用户身份的密钥(比如网络设备可以根据第一用户身份的密钥衍生出第二用户身份的密钥),或者用于生成第二用户身份密钥的信息),终端设备可以在第一用户身份的当前的无线配置信息的基础上,再根据第二用户身份的无线配置信息进行修改,从而获得第二用户身份对应的RRC连接对应的协议栈参数(比如SRB1的协议栈参数)。Further, in a), the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the second user identity. The wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters (such as the protocol stack parameters of SRB1) and/or the key information of the second user identity (the key information may include the key of the second user identity (for example, the network device can be based on the first user identity). The key derives the key of the second user identity), or the information used to generate the second user identity key), the terminal device can be based on the current wireless configuration information of the first user identity, and then according to the second user The wireless configuration information of the identity is modified to obtain the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the second user identity (for example, the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
可选地,在a)中,第一用户身份的RRC连接被终端设备的第二用户身份使用之后,该RRC连接不能够再被终端设备的第一用户身份使用。Optionally, in a), after the RRC connection of the first user identity is used by the second user identity of the terminal device, the RRC connection can no longer be used by the first user identity of the terminal device.
b),终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备利用配置信息以第二用户身份发起随机接入,配置信息可以包括随机接入的随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)资源。这样终端设备无需以第二用户身份使用竞争随机接入资源进行竞争方式的随机接入,而是直接利用配置信息包括的随机接入信道资源进行非竞争方式的随机接入,能够提高随机接入的成功率,也能降低随机接入的时延。b) The terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the second user identity according to the configuration information. It can be understood that the terminal device uses the configuration information to initiate random access with the second user identity, and the configuration information may include random access channels (random access). channel, RACH) resources. In this way, the terminal device does not need to use competing random access resources for random access in a competitive manner as the second user, but directly uses random access channel resources included in the configuration information to perform random access in a non-competitive manner, which can improve random access. The success rate can also reduce the delay of random access.
例如,RACH资源可以包括随机接入前导索引(随机接入前导索引用于指示随机接入前导)和/或随机接入资源对应的掩码索引,该掩码索引用于指示发送随机接入前导的时频资源。For example, the RACH resource may include a random access preamble index (the random access preamble index is used to indicate the random access preamble) and/or the mask index corresponding to the random access resource, and the mask index is used to indicate the sending of the random access preamble. Time-frequency resources.
可选的,第二用户身份进行随机接入可能是为了建立RRC连接,在空闲态时可以首次建立RRC连接或者RRC重建过程中建立RRC连接或者RRC恢复过程中建立RRC连接。Optionally, the random access of the second user identity may be to establish an RRC connection, and an RRC connection may be established for the first time in an idle state, or an RRC connection may be established during an RRC reestablishment process, or an RRC connection may be established during an RRC recovery process.
可选的,第二用户身份可以利用该随机接入信道资源进行4步随机接入或进行2步随机接入。当进行2步随机接入时,配置信息中还可能携带第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息。上行授权信息用于指示发送RRC建立请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息的资源或者发送携带C-RNTI的MAC控制元素。例如上行授权信息包括第二用户身份的上行调度间隔、第二用户身份的上行起始子帧号、第二用户身份的上行授权等。上行授权包括发送上行信息所使用的频域资源,时域资源,以及MCS等信息。Optionally, the second user identity can use the random access channel resource to perform 4-step random access or perform 2-step random access. When performing 2-step random access, the configuration information may also carry the uplink authorization information for establishing the RRC connection with the second user identity. The uplink grant information is used to indicate the resource for sending the RRC setup request message or the RRC reestablishment request message or the RRC recovery request message or the MAC control element carrying the C-RNTI. For example, the uplink authorization information includes the uplink scheduling interval of the second user identity, the uplink starting subframe number of the second user identity, and the uplink authorization of the second user identity. The uplink authorization includes information such as frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and MCS used to send uplink information.
c),终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备利用配置信息以第二用户身份建立RRC连接,例如配置信息可以包括用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身 份建立RRC连接的小区中第二用户身份的标识(比如,小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI)中的至少一种,上行授权信息用于指示发送RRC建立请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息的资源。这样,可以避免终端设备需要以第二用户身份发送随机接入前导码,并且需要在网络设备发送的随机接入响应中获取第二用户身份的上行授权信息和C-RNTI所带来的时延和开销,例如,在方法400中,可以避免终端设备还需要为第二用户身份执行步骤S410-S420,终端设备直接在上行授权信息指示的资源上向网络设备发送第二用户身份RRC连接建立请求消息,该第二用户身份可以使用第二用户身份的标识与网络侧通信。c) The establishment of an RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device uses the configuration information to establish the RRC connection as the second user identity. For example, the configuration information may include At least one of the uplink authorization information for establishing the RRC connection with the user identity and the identity of the second user in the cell where the terminal device establishes the RRC connection with the second user identity (for example, the cell radio network temporary identity C-RNTI) In one type, the uplink grant information is used to indicate the resource for sending the RRC establishment request message or the RRC reconstruction request message or the RRC recovery request message. In this way, it can be avoided that the terminal device needs to send the random access preamble as the second user identity, and needs to obtain the uplink authorization information of the second user identity and the delay caused by the C-RNTI in the random access response sent by the network device. And overhead. For example, in method 400, it can be avoided that the terminal device needs to perform steps S410-S420 for the second user identity. The terminal device directly sends the second user identity RRC connection establishment request to the network device on the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information. Message, the second user identity can use the identity of the second user identity to communicate with the network side.
例如上行授权信息包括第二用户身份的上行调度间隔、第二用户身份的上行起始子帧号、第二用户身份的上行授权等。上行授权包括发送上行信息所使用的频域资源,时域资源,以及MCS等信息。For example, the uplink authorization information includes the uplink scheduling interval of the second user identity, the uplink starting subframe number of the second user identity, and the uplink authorization of the second user identity. The uplink authorization includes information such as frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and MCS used to send uplink information.
d),终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备以第一用户身份和第二用户身份同时使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,则终端设备不用以第二用户身份发起随机接入,也不需要以第二用户身份再建立RRC连接,这样可以避免终端设备需要以第二用户身份发起RRC连接所带来的时延和开销,例如,在方法400中,可以避免终端设备还需要为第二用户身份执行一遍图4中步骤S410-S450造成的信令开销,并且也能降低终端设备发起第二用户身份的随机接入时延。并且第一用户身份建立的RRC连接也继续能被终端设备的第一用户身份使用,能够提高第一用户身份的RRC连接的利用率。d), the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user identity, which can be understood as: the terminal device uses the first user identity and the second user identity at the same time the terminal device uses the RRC connection established as the first user identity, then the terminal device does not Random access is initiated as the second user, and there is no need to establish an RRC connection as the second user. This can avoid the delay and overhead caused by the terminal device needing to initiate the RRC connection as the second user. For example, in the method In 400, the signaling overhead caused by the terminal device needing to perform steps S410-S450 in FIG. 4 for the second user identity can be avoided, and the random access delay for the terminal device to initiate the second user identity can also be reduced. In addition, the RRC connection established by the first user identity can continue to be used by the first user identity of the terminal device, which can improve the utilization rate of the RRC connection of the first user identity.
进一步地,在d)中,配置信息可以包括第二用户身份的无线配置信息。无线配置信息包括协议栈参数和/或第二用户身份的密钥信息(密钥信息可以包括第二用户身份的密钥(比如网络设备可以根据第一用户身份的密钥衍生出第二用户身份的密钥),或者用于生成第二用户身份的密钥的信息),终端设备可以在第一用户身份的当前的无线配置信息的基础上,再根据配置信息中包括的第二用户身份的无线配置信息进行修改,从而获得第二用户身份对应的RRC连接对应的协议栈参数(比如SRB1的协议栈参数)。Further, in d), the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the second user identity. The wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters and/or key information of the second user identity (the key information may include the key of the second user identity (for example, the network device can derive the second user identity from the key of the first user identity) Key), or information used to generate the key of the second user identity), the terminal device can be based on the current wireless configuration information of the first user identity, and then according to the second user identity included in the configuration information The wireless configuration information is modified to obtain the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the second user identity (for example, the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
进一步地,在d)中,配置信息还可以包括第二用户身份的DRB的配置信息,终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据DRB的配置信息进行第二用户身份的用户数据传输。Further, in d), the configuration information may also include the configuration information of the DRB of the second user identity, and the terminal device may use the second user identity to perform user data transmission of the second user identity according to the configuration information of the DRB.
在d)中,第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以具有不同的RRC层,该不同的RRC层在同一时刻可以为不同的用户身份的终端设备服务。In d), the first user identity and the second user identity may have different RRC layers, and the different RRC layers may serve terminal devices with different user identities at the same time.
具体地,在d)中,若终端设备以第一用户身份和第二用户身份同时使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,则终端设备同时保留第一用户身份的协议栈参数和第二用户身份的协议栈参数,和/或,终端设备可以同时保留第一用户身份的密钥和第二用户身份的密钥。Specifically, in d), if the terminal device uses the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity at the same time as the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device retains the protocol stack parameters of the first user identity and the first user identity at the same time. Two protocol stack parameters of the user identity, and/or, the terminal device can retain the key of the first user identity and the key of the second user identity at the same time.
e),终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接可以理解为:终端设备以第一用户身份和第二用户身份以时分复用的方式共同使用所述终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。这样可以避免终端设备需要以第二用户身份发起RRC连接所带来的时延和开销,例如,在方法400中,可以避免终端设备还需要为第二用户身份执行一遍图4中步骤S410-S450造成的信令开销,并且也能降低终端设备发起第二用户身份的随机接入时延。并且第一用户身份建立的RRC连接也继续能被终端设备的第一用户身份使用,能 够提高第一用户身份的RRC连接的利用率。e) The establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information can be understood as: the terminal device uses the first user identity and the second user identity in a time-division multiplexing manner to establish the RRC connection as the first user identity RRC connection. This can avoid the time delay and overhead caused by the terminal device needing to initiate the RRC connection as the second user. For example, in the method 400, it can avoid the terminal device needing to perform steps S410-S450 in FIG. 4 again for the second user identity. The resulting signaling overhead can also reduce the random access delay for the terminal device to initiate the second user identity. In addition, the RRC connection established by the first user identity can continue to be used by the first user identity of the terminal device, which can improve the utilization rate of the RRC connection of the first user identity.
进一步地,在e)中,配置信息可以包括第二用户身份的无线配置信息。无线配置信息包括协议栈参数和/或第二用户身份的密钥信息,终端设备可以在第一用户身份的当前的无线配置信息的基础上,再根据第二用户身份的无线配置信息进行修改,从而获得第二用户身份对应的RRC连接对应的协议栈参数(比如SRB1的协议栈参数)。Further, in e), the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the second user identity. The wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters and/or key information of the second user identity. The terminal device can modify the wireless configuration information of the second user identity on the basis of the current wireless configuration information of the first user identity, In this way, the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the second user identity (such as the protocol stack parameters of SRB1) are obtained.
在e)中,第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以具有相同的RRC层(RRC实体),该相同的RRC层在在不同的时刻可以为不同的用户身份的终端设备服务,在同一时刻只能为一个用户身份服务。即第一用户身份和第二用户身份通过时分的方式使用该RRC层。In e), the first user identity and the second user identity can have the same RRC layer (RRC entity), and the same RRC layer can serve terminal devices with different user identities at different times, and only Can serve a user identity. That is, the first user identity and the second user identity use the RRC layer in a time division manner.
具体地,在e)中,若某一时刻,终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接只能被终端设备的第二用户身份使用,这样终端设备可以使用第二用户身份对应的协议栈参数,在下一时刻,终端设备以第一用户身份可以继续使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,终端设备使用第一用户身份对应的协议栈参数;或者,在e)中,某一时刻终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接只能被终端设备的第二用户身份使用,这样终端设备可以将第一用户身份的密钥修改为第二用户身份的密钥,在下一时刻,终端设备以第一用户身份可以继续使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,终端设备可以将第二用户身份的密钥再修改为第一用户身份的密钥。Specifically, in e), if at a certain moment, the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity can only be used by the second user identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device can use the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the second user identity , At the next moment, the terminal device as the first user identity can continue to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the first user identity; or, in e), at a certain moment The RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity can only be used by the second user identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device can modify the key of the first user identity to the key of the second user identity. At the next moment, the terminal The device as the first user identity can continue to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, and the terminal device can modify the key of the second user identity to the key of the first user identity.
可选的,第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以具有不同的RRC层(RRC实体),不同的时刻可以采用不同的用户身份对应的RRC实体为终端设备服务。某一时刻终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接只能被终端设备的第二用户身份使用,这样终端设备使用第二用户身份的RRC实体为第二用户身份提供服务。在下一时刻,终端设备以第一用户身份可以继续使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,终端设备使用第一用户身份的RRC实体为第一用户身份提供服务。或者,某一时刻终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接只能被终端设备的第二用户身份使用,这样终端设备可以使用第二用户身份的密钥,在下一时刻,终端设备以第一用户身份可以继续使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,终端设备可以使用第一用户身份的密钥。Optionally, the first user identity and the second user identity may have different RRC layers (RRC entities), and RRC entities corresponding to different user identities may be used to serve the terminal device at different times. At a certain moment, the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity can only be used by the second user identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device uses the RRC entity of the second user identity to provide services for the second user identity. At the next moment, the terminal device as the first user identity can continue to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, and the terminal device uses the RRC entity of the first user identity to provide services for the first user identity. Or, the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user at a certain moment can only be used by the second user identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device can use the key of the second user identity. At the next moment, the terminal device uses the first user identity. The user identity can continue to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity, and the terminal device can use the key of the first user identity.
进一步地,在e)中,配置信息还可以包括第二用户身份的DRB的配置信息,第二用户身份可以以第二用户身份根据DRB的配置信息进行第二用户身份对应的用户数据传输。Further, in e), the configuration information may also include configuration information of the DRB of the second user identity, and the second user identity may use the second user identity to perform user data transmission corresponding to the second user identity according to the configuration information of the DRB.
在上述d)和e)中,终端设备接收到第一RRC消息之后,有可能第一RRC消息中包括第一用户身份的信息,也有可能第一RRC消息中包括第二用户身份的信息,也有可能第一RRC消息中包括第一用户身份的信息和第二用户身份的信息。终端设备需要确定第一用户身份的RRC连接是否能被第二用户身份使用,换句话说,终端设备需要确定第一RRC消息中是否包括第二用户身份的信息,例如该信息可以为前述的配置信息。可以通过以下至少一种方式确定第一用户身份的RRC连接是否能被第二用户身份使用。In the above d) and e), after the terminal device receives the first RRC message, it is possible that the first RRC message includes information about the identity of the first user, or it may include information about the identity of the second user in the first RRC message, or It is possible that the first RRC message includes the identity information of the first user and the identity information of the second user. The terminal device needs to determine whether the RRC connection of the first user identity can be used by the second user identity. In other words, the terminal device needs to determine whether the second user identity information is included in the first RRC message. For example, the information may be the aforementioned configuration information. Whether the RRC connection of the first user identity can be used by the second user identity can be determined by at least one of the following methods.
方式一,若第一RRC消息包括终端设备第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,第二RRC消息包括配置信息,这样终端设备能够根据第一RRC消息包括的第二RRC消息确定终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。即方式一可以通过RRC消息的嵌套确定以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。Manner 1: If the first RRC message includes the second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes configuration information, the terminal device can determine that the terminal device can use the first RRC message according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message. Second, the user identity uses the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity. That is, in the first way, the RRC connection established as the first user using the terminal device as the second user can be determined through the nesting of RRC messages.
在方式一中,若第一RRC消息除了包括第二RRC消息之外还包括第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第一用户身份和第二用户身份共有的。即第一RRC消息同时携带第一用户身份和第二用户身份的信息。In the first manner, if the first RRC message includes other information of the first user identity in addition to the second RRC message, the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity. That is, the first RRC message carries information about the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user at the same time.
若第一RRC消息除了包括第二RRC消息之外还包括第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第一用户身份和第二用户身份共有的,终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以同时使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接;若第一RRC消息除了包括第二RRC消息之外不包括任何第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第二用户身份的RRC消息,终端设备以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。If the first RRC message includes other information of the first user identity in addition to the second RRC message, the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device are shared. The two user identities can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user at the same time; if the first RRC message does not include any other information of the first user identity except the second RRC message, the first RRC message is the second In the RRC message of the user identity, the terminal device uses the RRC connection established with the first user identity by the terminal device as the second user identity.
可选地,网络设备可以向终端设备发送使用RRC连接的指示信息,具体该使用RRC连接的指示信息用于指示:若第一RRC消息除了包括第二RRC消息之外还包括第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第一用户身份和第二用户身份共有的,终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以同时使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接;若第一RRC消息除了包括第二RRC消息之外不包括任何第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第二用户身份的RRC消息,终端设备以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。Optionally, the network device may send indication information for using the RRC connection to the terminal device, and the specific indication information for using the RRC connection is used to indicate: if the first RRC message includes the first user identity in addition to the second RRC message For other information, the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity at the same time; If an RRC message does not include any other information about the identity of the first user except the second RRC message, the first RRC message is an RRC message with the identity of the second user, and the terminal device uses the terminal device as the second user as the first user. The RRC connection established by the identity.
方式二,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的所述配置信息用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接,这样终端设备能够根据第一RRC消息包括的第一指示信息确定终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。即方式二可以通过第一RRC消息中显式的指示确定以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。例如,第一RRC消息中的无线承载配置中可以携带第一指示信息。Manner 2: The first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used for the terminal device to establish as the second user identity RRC connection, so that the terminal device can determine, according to the first indication information included in the first RRC message, that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user as the second user. That is, in the second manner, an explicit indication in the first RRC message can be used to determine the RRC connection established as the first user using the terminal device as the second user. For example, the radio bearer configuration in the first RRC message may carry the first indication information.
在方式二中,若第一RRC消息除了包括第一指示信息和配置信息之外还包括第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第一用户身份和第二用户身份共有的,终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以同时使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接;若第一RRC消息除了包括第一指示信息和配置信息之外不包括任何第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第二用户身份的RRC消息,终端设备以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。In the second method, if the first RRC message includes other information of the first user identity in addition to the first indication information and configuration information, the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the terminal The first user identity and the second user identity of the device can simultaneously use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity; if the first RRC message does not include any information about the first user identity except for the first indication information and configuration information For other information, the first RRC message is an RRC message of the second user identity, and the terminal device uses the RRC connection established with the first user identity by the terminal device as the second user identity.
可选地,网络设备可以向终端设备发送使用RRC连接的指示信息,具体该使用RRC连接的指示信息用于指示:若第一RRC消息除了包括第一指示信息和配置信息之外还包括第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第一用户身份和第二用户身份共有的,终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以同时使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接;若第一RRC消息除了包括第一指示信息和配置信息之外不包括任何第一用户身份的其他信息,则第一RRC消息为第二用户身份的RRC消息,终端设备以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。Optionally, the network device may send indication information for using the RRC connection to the terminal device. The specific indication information for using the RRC connection is used to indicate: if the first RRC message includes the first indication information and configuration information, it also includes the first indication information and configuration information. For other information of the user identity, the first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity at the same time ; If the first RRC message does not include any other information about the identity of the first user except for the first indication information and configuration information, the first RRC message is an RRC message with the identity of the second user, and the terminal device uses the identity of the second user The RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
方式三,终端设备的不同用户身份的配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置,终端设备根据所述第二用户身份的配置信息所在的信元是否出现了,就能确定中终端设备可以以第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。协议可以规定网络设备配置终端设备的不同用户身份的配置信息所在的信元在所述第一 RRC消息的不同位置。Manner 3: The cell where the configuration information of the different user identities of the terminal device is located is in different positions of the first RRC message, and the terminal equipment can determine whether the cell where the configuration information of the second user identity is located is present. The middle terminal device may use the RRC connection established by the terminal device in the identity of the first user as the second user. The protocol may stipulate that the information elements in which the network equipment configures the configuration information of different user identities of the terminal equipment are located in different positions of the first RRC message.
例如,配置信息所在的信元在RRC消息的位置1,表示该配置信息为终端设备的第一用户身份的,配置信息所在的信元在RRC消息的位置2,表示该配置信息为终端设备的第二用户身份的。这样,终端设备接收到第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息中配置信息所在的信元在第一RRC消息位置2,终端设备可以确定该配置信息为第二用户身份的,这样,终端设备可以确定以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接;或者终端设备接收到第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息的位置1有配置信息,位置2也有配置信息,则终端设备可以确定该第一RRC消息为第一用户身份和第二用户身份共有的,终端设备可以以第一用户身份和第二用户身份共同使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。For example, the information element where the configuration information is located at position 1 of the RRC message indicates that the configuration information is the first user identity of the terminal device, and the information element where the configuration information is located at position 2 of the RRC message indicates that the configuration information is that of the terminal device. The identity of the second user. In this way, the terminal device receives the first RRC message, and the cell containing the configuration information in the first RRC message is in position 2 of the first RRC message, and the terminal device can determine that the configuration information is the identity of the second user, so that the terminal device can determine Use the terminal device as the second user to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the first user; or the terminal device receives the first RRC message, and the first RRC message has configuration information in position 1 and configuration information in position 2, and the terminal device can determine The first RRC message is shared by the first user identity and the second user identity, and the terminal device can use the first user identity and the second user identity to jointly use the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity.
在上述d)和e)中,终端设备接收到第一RRC消息之后,第一RRC消息可能包括第一用户身份的非接入层(non-access,NAS)消息,也有可能包括第一用户身份的NAS消息和第二用户身份的NAS消息,也有可能包括第二用户身份的NAS消息,若第一RRC消息中包括一个NAS消息,则终端设备需要确定该NAS消息为第一用户身份的NAS消息还是第二用户身份的NAS消息。可以通过以下至少一种方式确定第一RRC消息包括的NAS消息是第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。In the above d) and e), after the terminal device receives the first RRC message, the first RRC message may include the non-access stratum (non-access, NAS) message of the first user identity, and may also include the first user identity The NAS message and the NAS message of the second user identity may also include the NAS message of the second user identity. If the first RRC message includes a NAS message, the terminal device needs to determine that the NAS message is the NAS message of the first user identity It is also the NAS message of the second user identity. It may be determined whether the NAS message included in the first RRC message belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity through at least one of the following methods.
方式一,若第一RRC消息包括终端设备第二用户身份的第五RRC消息,第五RRC消息包括NAS消息,这样终端设备能够根据第一RRC消息包括的第五RRC消息确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的NAS消息。即方式一可以通过RRC消息的嵌套确定NAS消息为哪个用户身份的。Manner 1: If the first RRC message includes the fifth RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the fifth RRC message includes the NAS message, the terminal device can determine that the NAS message is the first RRC message according to the fifth RRC message included in the first RRC message. 2. NAS message of user identity. That is to say, in mode one, the user identity of the NAS message can be determined through the nesting of the RRC message.
可以理解的是,若终端设备根据第五RRC消息确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的,也可以认为终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。It is understandable that if the terminal device determines that the NAS message is the second user identity according to the fifth RRC message, it can also be considered that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity as the second user identity.
可选地,第五RRC消息可以为前述第二RRC消息,即第一用户身份的第一RRC消息包括第二RRC消息,该第二RRC消息包括配置信息和NAS消息,该终端设备可以确定该配置信息和NAS消息为第二用户身份的,也可以理解为终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。Optionally, the fifth RRC message may be the aforementioned second RRC message, that is, the first RRC message of the first user identity includes a second RRC message, and the second RRC message includes configuration information and a NAS message. The terminal device may determine the If the configuration information and the NAS message are the identity of the second user, it can also be understood that the terminal device can use the identity of the second user to use the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the first user.
方式二,所述第一RRC消息包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的NAS消息为第二用户身份的NAS消息,这样终端设备能够根据第一RRC消息包括的第二指示信息确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的。即方式二可以通过第一RRC消息中显式的指示确定NAS消息为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。Manner 2: The first RRC message includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the NAS message included in the first RRC message is a NAS message with a second user identity, so that the terminal device can follow the first The second indication information included in the RRC message determines that the NAS message is the second user identity. That is, in the second mode, it can be determined whether the NAS message belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity through an explicit indication in the first RRC message.
可以理解的是,若终端设备根据第二指示信息确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的,也可以认为终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。It is understandable that if the terminal device determines that the NAS message is the second user identity according to the second indication information, it can also be considered that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity as the second user identity.
可选地,第一RRC消息可以包括NAS消息、配置信息、第一指示信息和第二指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示配置信息为第二用户身份的,第二指示信息用于指示NAS消息为第二用户身份的,则终端设备可以根据第一指示信息和第二指示信息确定NAS消息和配置信息都为第二用户身份的,也可以理解为终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。Optionally, the first RRC message may include a NAS message, configuration information, first indication information, and second indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information is the identity of the second user, and the second indication information is used to indicate the NAS If the message is the second user identity, the terminal device can determine that the NAS message and configuration information are both the second user identity according to the first indication information and the second indication information, and it can also be understood that the terminal device can use the terminal as the second user identity The RRC connection established by the device as the first user.
方式三,终端设备的不同用户身份的NAS消息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置,终端设备根据NAS消息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息中的位置确定NAS消息为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。协议可以规定网络设备配置终端设备的不同用户身份的NAS消息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置。Manner 3: The cell of the NAS message with different user identities of the terminal device is located at a different position of the first RRC message, and the terminal device determines that the NAS message is based on the position of the cell containing the NAS message in the first RRC message The identity of the first user is still the identity of the second user. The protocol may stipulate that the network device configures the cell in which the NAS message of different user identities of the terminal device is located in different positions of the first RRC message.
例如,NAS消息所在的信元在RRC消息的位置3,表示该NAS消息为终端设备的第一用户身份的,NAS消息所在的信元在RRC消息的位置4,表示该NAS消息为终端设备的第二用户身份的。这样,终端设备接收到第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息中NAS消息所在的信元在第一RRC消息位置4,终端设备可以确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的;或者终端设备接收到第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息的位置3有NAS消息,位置4也有NAS消息,则终端设备可以确定位置3的NAS消息为第一用户身份的,位置4的NAS消息为第二用户身份。For example, the cell where the NAS message is located at position 3 of the RRC message indicates that the NAS message is the first user identity of the terminal device, and the cell where the NAS message is located is at position 4 of the RRC message, which indicates that the NAS message is for the terminal device. The identity of the second user. In this way, the terminal device receives the first RRC message, and the cell where the NAS message in the first RRC message is located is at position 4 of the first RRC message, and the terminal device can determine that the NAS message is of the second user identity; or the terminal device receives the first RRC message. For an RRC message, the location 3 of the first RRC message has a NAS message, and the location 4 also has a NAS message, the terminal device can determine that the NAS message of location 3 is the identity of the first user, and the NAS message of location 4 is the identity of the second user.
可以理解的是,若终端设备根据NAS消息所在的信元确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的,也可以认为终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。It is understandable that if the terminal device determines that the NAS message is the second user identity according to the cell where the NAS message is located, it can also be considered that the terminal device can use the terminal device as the second user identity to establish the RRC connection with the first user identity.
可选地,结合上述的例子,第一RRC消息的位置1包括配置信息,位置3包括NAS消息,终端设备可以确定位置1的配置信息和位置3的NAS消息为第二用户身份的,也可以理解为终端设备能够以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。Optionally, in combination with the above example, position 1 of the first RRC message includes configuration information, and position 3 includes a NAS message. The terminal device can determine that the configuration information of position 1 and the NAS message of position 3 are the identity of the second user, or It is understood that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user as the second user.
上述确定配置信息和NAS消息为第二用户身份的方式可以结合,下面可以举例说明:The foregoing manners of determining the configuration information and the NAS message as the identity of the second user can be combined. The following examples can illustrate:
例一,第一RRC消息中包括第二用户身份的第二RRC消息、NAS消息和第二指示信息,第二RRC消息中包括配置信息,终端设备根据第二指示信息确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的,终端设备可以根据第二RRC消息确定配置信息为第二用户身份的。Example 1: The first RRC message includes the second RRC message of the second user identity, the NAS message, and the second indication information, the second RRC message includes configuration information, and the terminal device determines that the NAS message is second according to the second indication information. For the user identity, the terminal device may determine that the configuration information is the second user identity according to the second RRC message.
例二,第一RRC消息包括配置信息,NAS消息和第二指示信息,其中配置信息所在的信元在第一RRC消息的位置2,终端设备根据第二指示信息确定该NAS消息为第二用户身份的,终端设备可以根据配置信息所在的信元的位置确定配置信息也为第二用户身份的。Example 2: The first RRC message includes configuration information, a NAS message, and second indication information. The cell where the configuration information is located is at the position of the first RRC message 2. The terminal device determines that the NAS message is the second user according to the second indication information. For the identity, the terminal device may determine that the configuration information is also the identity of the second user according to the location of the cell where the configuration information is located.
例三,第一RRC消息包括第五RRC消息、配置信息、第一指示信息,第五RRC消息包括NAS消息,终端设备可以根据第一指示信息确定配置信息为第二用户身份的,终端设备可以根据第五RRC消息确定NAS消息为第二用户身份的。Example 3: The first RRC message includes the fifth RRC message, configuration information, and first indication information. The fifth RRC message includes the NAS message. If the terminal device can determine that the configuration information is the second user identity according to the first indication information, the terminal device may It is determined according to the fifth RRC message that the NAS message is the identity of the second user.
例四,第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息、第二指示信息,配置信息和NAS消息,终端设备可以根据第一指示信息确定配置信息为第二用户身份的,终端设备可以根据第二指示信息确定NAS消息为第二用户身份的。Example 4: The first RRC message includes the first indication information, the second indication information, the configuration information, and the NAS message. If the terminal device can determine that the configuration information is the second user identity according to the first indication information, the terminal device can according to the second indication information It is determined that the NAS message is the identity of the second user.
可以理解的是,若终端设备确定第一RRC消息中包括配置信息和/或NAS消息为第二用户身份的,则可以理解为终端设备可以以第二用户身份使用终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。It is understandable that if the terminal device determines that the configuration information and/or the NAS message included in the first RRC message is the second user identity, it can be understood that the terminal device can use the terminal device to establish the identity of the first user as the second user. RRC connection.
需要说明的是,上述是为了方便描述,只说明确定第一RRC消息包括的配置信息和/或NAS消息为第二用户身份的,第一RRC消息还可以包括第一用户身份的配置信息和/或NAS消息,第一用户身份的配置信息和/或NAS消息类似于第二用户身份的配置信息和/或NAS消息,例如,第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息、第三指示信息、配置信息1 和配置信息2,第一指示信息用于指示配置信息1为第二用户身份的,第三指示信息用于指示配置信息2为第一用户身份的。为了避免赘述在此不详细描述。It should be noted that the above is for the convenience of description, and only illustrates that the configuration information and/or NAS message included in the first RRC message are determined as the second user identity, and the first RRC message may also include the configuration information of the first user identity and/or Or NAS message, the configuration information of the first user identity and/or the NAS message is similar to the configuration information and/or NAS message of the second user identity, for example, the first RRC message includes first indication information, third indication information, and configuration information 1 and configuration information 2. The first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information 1 is the identity of the second user, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information 2 is the identity of the first user. In order to avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
可选地,第一RRC消息可以包括对应关系,对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。Optionally, the first RRC message may include a correspondence, the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate that different logical channels of the same bearer correspond to different user identities, or The correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate different bandwidths. Part of the BWP corresponds to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used by the terminal device to determine the first user identity or the second user identity. user ID.
具体来说,终端设备后续接收到数据包(数据包包括通过SRB传输的RRC消息和/或通过DRB传输的数据)之后,由于终端设备同时支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份,终端设备需要确定该数据包为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。例如,对应关系用于指示承载1对应第一用户身份,承载标识2对应第二用户身份,若终端设备接收到的数据包对应的承载为承载1(比如通过MAC层携带的逻辑信道标识获知该数据包对应承载1),则该数据包为网络设备发送给第一用户身份的终端设备的,若终端设备接收到数据包的承载为承载2(比如通过MAC层携带的逻辑信道标识获知该数据包对应承载2),则该数据包为网络设备发送给第二用户身份的终端设备的。又例如,终端设备的两个用户身份的数据包的承载标识可能相同,对应关系可以指示承载1的逻辑信道1对应第一用户身份,承载1的逻辑信道2对应第二用户身份,若终端设备接收到数据包的承载为承载1并且该承载1的逻辑信道为逻辑信道1(比如通过MAC层携带的逻辑信道标识获知该数据包对应逻辑信道1),则该数据包为网络设备发送给第一用户身份的终端设备的;若终端设备接收到数据包的承载为承载1并且该承载1的逻辑信道为逻辑信道2(比如通过MAC层携带的逻辑信道标识获知该数据包对应逻辑信道2),则该数据包为网络设备发送给第二用户身份的终端设备的。再例如,对应关系可以指示密钥1对应第一用户身份,密钥2对应第二用户身份,终端设备接收到数据包之后,终端设备尝试利用密钥1和密钥2解数据包,若终端设备利用密钥1能正确解数据包,则该数据包为网络设备发送给第一用户身份的终端设备的;若终端设备利用密钥2能正确解数据包,则该数据包为网络设备发送给第二用户身份的终端设备的。再例如,对应关系可以指示C-RNTI1对应第一用户身份,C-RNTI2对应第二用户身份,若终端设备用C-RNTI 1接收到下行物理控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)(比如通过C-RNTI 1成功进行解扰PDCCH),则该PDCCH中指示的调度数据就为第一用户身份的,即PDCCH中指示的下行物理共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)中携带的数据就为第一用户身份的。若终端设备用C-RNTI 2接收到下行物理控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)(比如通过C-RNTI 2成功进行解扰PDCCH),则该PDCCH中指示的调度数据就为第二用户身份的,即PDCCH中指示的下行物理共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)中携带的数据就为第二用户身份的。再例如,对应关系可以指示带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)1对应第一用户身份,BWP2对应第二用户身份,终端设备从BWP1接收到数据包,则终端设备可以确定该数据包为网络设备发送给第一用户身份的终端设备的,若终端设备从BWP2接收到数据包,则终端设备可以确定该数据包为网络设备发送给第二用户身份的 终端设备的。再例如,对应关系可以指示子载波间隔1对应第一用户身份,子载波间隔2对应第二用户身份,终端设备从子载波间隔1对应的物理信道中接收到数据包,则终端设备可以确定该数据包为网络设备发送给第一用户身份的终端设备的,若终端设备从子载波间隔2对应的物理信道中接收到数据包,则终端设备可以确定该数据包为网络设备发送给第二用户身份的终端设备的。Specifically, after the terminal device subsequently receives the data packet (the data packet includes the RRC message transmitted via SRB and/or the data transmitted via DRB), since the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device needs It is determined whether the data packet belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity. For example, the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that bearer 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and bearer identity 2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the bearer corresponding to the data packet received by the terminal device is bearer 1 (for example, the logical channel identity carried by the MAC layer knows this The data packet corresponds to bearer 1), then the data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device with the first user identity. If the terminal device receives the data packet as bearer 2 (for example, the data is learned through the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer) The packet corresponds to bearer 2), and the data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the second user identity. For another example, the bearer identifiers of the data packets of the two user identities of the terminal device may be the same, and the corresponding relationship may indicate that the logical channel 1 of bearer 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and the logical channel 2 of bearer 1 corresponds to the second user identity. The bearer of the received data packet is bearer 1 and the logical channel of bearer 1 is logical channel 1 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer knows that the data packet corresponds to logical channel 1), then the data packet is sent by the network device to the first A terminal device with a user identity; if the bearer of the data packet received by the terminal device is bearer 1 and the logical channel of bearer 1 is logical channel 2 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer knows that the data packet corresponds to logical channel 2) , The data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the second user identity. For another example, the correspondence relationship may indicate that key 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and key 2 corresponds to the second user identity. After the terminal device receives the data packet, the terminal device tries to use the key 1 and key 2 to decrypt the data packet. If the device can correctly decode the data packet using key 1, the data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the first user identity; if the terminal device can correctly decode the data packet using key 2, the data packet is sent by the network device To the terminal device of the second user identity. For another example, the correspondence relationship may indicate that C-RNTI1 corresponds to the first user identity, and C-RNTI2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the terminal device uses C-RNTI 1 to receive the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) (for example, through C-RNTI 1 successfully descrambles the PDCCH), the scheduling data indicated in the PDCCH is the first user identity, that is, the data carried in the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) indicated in the PDCCH is The identity of the first user. If the terminal device uses the C-RNTI 2 to receive the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) (for example, the PDCCH is successfully descrambled through the C-RNTI 2), the scheduling data indicated in the PDCCH is the second user identity Yes, that is, the data carried in the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) indicated in the PDCCH is the identity of the second user. For another example, the correspondence relationship may indicate that the bandwidth part (BWP) 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and BWP2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the terminal device receives a data packet from BWP1, the terminal device can determine that the data packet is sent by the network device. For the terminal device of the first user identity, if the terminal device receives a data packet from the BWP2, the terminal device can determine that the data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the second user identity. For another example, the correspondence relationship may indicate that subcarrier interval 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and subcarrier interval 2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the terminal device receives a data packet from the physical channel corresponding to subcarrier interval 1, the terminal device can determine the The data packet is sent by the network device to the terminal device of the first user. If the terminal device receives the data packet from the physical channel corresponding to the subcarrier interval 2, the terminal device can determine that the data packet is sent by the network device to the second user The identity of the terminal equipment.
相应地,结合上述例子,网络设备后续接收到数据包(这里包括通过SRB传输的RRC消息和/或通过DRB传输的数据)之后,由于终端设备同时支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份,网络设备需要确定该数据包为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的。例如,对应关系用于指示承载1对应第一用户身份,承载标识2对应第二用户身份,若网络设备接收到的数据包对应的承载为承载1(比如通过MAC层携带的逻辑信道标识获知该数据包对应承载1),则该数据包为终端设备是以第一用户身份发送给网络设备的,若网络设备接收到数据包的承载为承载2(比如通过MAC层携带的逻辑信道标识获知该数据包对应承载2),则该数据包为终端设备是以第二用户身份发送给网络设备的。又例如,终端设备的两个用户身份的数据包的承载标识可能相同,对应关系可以指示承载1的逻辑信道1对应第一用户身份,承载1的逻辑信道2对应第二用户身份,若网络设备接收到数据包的承载为承载1并且该承载1的逻辑信道为逻辑信道1(比如通过MAC层携带的逻辑信道标识获知该数据包对应逻辑信道1),则该数据包为终端设备是以第一用户身份发送给网络设备的;若网路设备接收到数据包的承载为承载1并且该承载1的逻辑信道为逻辑信道2(比如通过MAC层携带的逻辑信道标识获知该数据包对应逻辑信道2),则该数据包为终端设备是以第二用户身份发送给网络设备的。再例如,对应关系可以指示密钥1对应第一用户身份,密钥2对应第二用户身份,网络设备接收到数据包之后,网络设备尝试利用密钥1和密钥2解数据包,若网络设备利用密钥1能正确解数据包,则该数据包为终端设备是以第一用户身份发送给网络设备的;若网络设备利用密钥2能正确解数据包,则该数据包为终端设备是以第二用户身份发送给网络设备的。再例如,对应关系可以指示C-RNTI1对应第一用户身份,C-RNTI2对应第二用户身份,若网络设备用C-RNTI 1发送PDCCH以便终端设备发送上行信息,则该PDCCH中指示的调度数据就为第一用户身份的,比如PDCCH中指示的PUSCH中携带的数据就为第一用户身份的。若网络设备用C-RNTI 2发送PDCCH)以便终端设备发送上行信息,则该PDCCH中指示的调度数据就为第二用户身份的,比如PDCCH中指示的PYSCH中携带的数据就为第二用户身份的。再例如,对应关系可以指示BWP1对应第一用户身份,BWP2对应第二用户身份,网路设备从BWP1接收到数据包,则网络设备可以确定该数据包为终端设备以第一用户身份发送给网络设备的,若网路设备从BWP2接收到数据包,则网络设备可以确定该数据包为终端设备以第二用户身份发送给网络设备的。再例如,对应关系可以指示子载波间隔1对应第一用户身份,子载波间隔2对应第二用户身份,网络设备从子载波间隔1对应的物理信道中接收到数据包,则网络设备可以确定该数据包为终端设备以第一用户身份发送给网络设备的,若网络设备从子载波间隔2对应的物理信道中接收到数据包,则网络设备可以确定该数据包为终端设备以第二用户身份发送给网络设备的。Correspondingly, in combination with the above example, after the network device subsequently receives the data packet (here including the RRC message transmitted via SRB and/or the data transmitted via DRB), since the terminal device supports both the first user identity and the second user identity, the network The device needs to determine whether the data packet belongs to the first user identity or the second user identity. For example, the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that the bearer 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and the bearer identity 2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the bearer corresponding to the data packet received by the network device is bearer 1 (for example, the logical channel identity carried by the MAC layer knows this The data packet corresponds to bearer 1), then the data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the first user. If the bearer of the data packet received by the network device is bearer 2 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer knows the data packet The data packet corresponds to bearer 2), and the data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the second user. For another example, the bearer identifiers of the data packets of the two user identities of the terminal device may be the same, and the corresponding relationship may indicate that the logical channel 1 of bearer 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and the logical channel 2 of bearer 1 corresponds to the second user identity. The bearer of the received data packet is bearer 1 and the logical channel of bearer 1 is logical channel 1 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer knows that the data packet corresponds to logical channel 1), then the data packet is a terminal device. A user identity is sent to the network device; if the bearer of the data packet received by the network device is bearer 1 and the logical channel of the bearer 1 is logical channel 2 (for example, the logical channel identifier carried by the MAC layer is used to learn the logical channel corresponding to the data packet 2), the data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the second user. For another example, the corresponding relationship may indicate that key 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and key 2 corresponds to the second user identity. After the network device receives the data packet, the network device tries to use the key 1 and key 2 to decrypt the data packet. The device can correctly decode the data packet using key 1, then the data packet is sent to the network device as the first user by the terminal device; if the network device can correctly decode the data packet using key 2, the data packet is a terminal device It is sent to the network device as the second user. For another example, the correspondence relationship may indicate that C-RNTI1 corresponds to the first user identity, and C-RNTI2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the network device uses C-RNTI 1 to send the PDCCH so that the terminal device can send uplink information, the scheduling data indicated in the PDCCH It is the identity of the first user, for example, the data carried in the PUSCH indicated in the PDCCH is the identity of the first user. If the network device uses C-RNTI 2 to send the PDCCH so that the terminal device sends uplink information, the scheduling data indicated in the PDCCH is the second user identity, for example, the data carried in the PYSCH indicated in the PDCCH is the second user identity of. For another example, the correspondence relationship may indicate that BWP1 corresponds to the first user identity, and BWP2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the network device receives a data packet from BWP1, the network device may determine that the data packet is a terminal device and sent to the network as the first user. For the device, if the network device receives a data packet from BWP2, the network device can determine that the data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the second user. For another example, the correspondence relationship may indicate that subcarrier interval 1 corresponds to the first user identity, and subcarrier interval 2 corresponds to the second user identity. If the network device receives a data packet from the physical channel corresponding to subcarrier interval 1, the network device can determine the The data packet is sent by the terminal device to the network device as the first user. If the network device receives the data packet from the physical channel corresponding to the subcarrier interval 2, the network device can determine that the data packet is the terminal device as the second user. Sent to the network device.
作为一个可选实施例,终端设备收到第一RRC消息之后,终端设备需要给网络设备反馈第八RRC消息,第八RRC消息中携带RRC响应信息和/或NAS消息。网络设备也 需要区分第一用户身份和第二用户身份的RRC响应信息和/或NAS消息。具体方法可以同以上的方式一(即终端设备以第一用户身份给网络设备发送的第八RRC消息中携带第二用户身份的RRC消息),方式二(即终端设备以第一用户身份给网络设备发送的第八RRC消息中携带指示信息,指示对应的RRC响应信息和/或NAS消息是哪一个用户身份的),方式三(不同用户身份的RRC响应信息和/或NAS消息在第八RRC消息的不同的位置)。As an optional embodiment, after the terminal device receives the first RRC message, the terminal device needs to feed back an eighth RRC message to the network device, and the eighth RRC message carries the RRC response information and/or the NAS message. The network device also needs to distinguish the RRC response information and/or NAS message of the first user identity and the second user identity. The specific method can be the same as the above method one (that is, the eighth RRC message sent by the terminal device as the first user to the network device carries the RRC message of the second user identity), and the second method (that is, the terminal device sends the RRC message to the network device as the first user). The eighth RRC message sent by the device carries indication information, indicating which user identity the corresponding RRC response information and/or NAS message belongs to), mode three (the RRC response information and/or NAS messages of different user identities are in the eighth RRC Different positions of the message).
需要说明的是,当终端设备以第二用户身份根据配置信息建立RRC连接之后。终端设备与网络设备之间的RRC信息以及NAS消息交互(包括网络设备给终端设备发送和终端设备给网络设备发送)也可以按照以上中的方式一,方式二,方式三中的方法确定对应的RRC信息以及NAS信息是属于哪一个用户身份的。It should be noted that after the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user. The RRC information and NAS message interaction between the terminal equipment and the network equipment (including the network equipment sending to the terminal equipment and the terminal equipment sending to the network equipment) can also be determined according to the above method 1, method 2, and method 3. Which user identity the RRC information and NAS information belong to.
作为一个可选实施例,在方法500中网络设备在寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备时,网络设备可以向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三RRC消息,终端设备以第一用户身份接收网络设备发送的第三RRC消息,该第三RRC消息包括用于寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备的第一寻呼信息,例如,该第一寻呼信息可以携带第二用户身份的标识。在终端设备还没有确定第二用户身份是否能使用第一用户身份的RRC连接,或者终端设备还没有以第二用户身份完成随机接入的过程时,网络设备可以将寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备的寻呼信息携带在第一用户身份的第三RRC消息中,避免网络设备无法寻呼到第二用户身份的终端设备。As an optional embodiment, in the method 500, when the network device is paging the terminal device of the second user identity, the network device may send a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device receives it as the first user identity. The third RRC message sent by the network device includes the first paging information used to page the terminal device of the second user identity. For example, the first paging information may carry the identity of the second user identity. When the terminal device has not determined whether the second user identity can use the RRC connection of the first user identity, or the terminal device has not completed the random access process as the second user identity, the network device may page the second user identity The paging information of the terminal device is carried in the third RRC message of the first user identity, so as to prevent the network device from being unable to page the terminal device of the second user identity.
需要说明的是,该第三RRC消息可以为前述的第一RRC消息,即第三RRC消息和第一RRC消息为同一个RRC消息;或者该第三RRC消息与前述的第一RRC消息不同,例如该第三RRC消息可以为网络设备在向终端设备发送第一RRC消息之前向终端设备发送的。It should be noted that the third RRC message may be the aforementioned first RRC message, that is, the third RRC message and the first RRC message are the same RRC message; or the third RRC message is different from the aforementioned first RRC message, For example, the third RRC message may be sent by the network device to the terminal device before sending the first RRC message to the terminal device.
作为一个可选实施例,终端设备还没有建立第二用户身份的RRC连接或者还没有完成第二用户身份的随机接入过程时,则终端设备无法向网络设备上报第二用户身份的记录型的最小化路测(minimization of drive test,MDT)(即logged MDT)信息或无线链路失败信息或接入失败信息,因此,终端设备可以以第一用户身份向网络设备发送第四RRC消息,第四RRC消息包括终端设备的第二用户身份的logged MDT信息或无线链路失败信息或接入失败信息(不同的信息可以在不同的信元位置携带),这样,可以避免第二用户身份的logged MDT信息或无线链路失败信息或接入失败信息过时失效或删除。可选地,在终端设备发送第四RRC消息之前,终端设备先以第一用户身份向网络设备发送第六RRC消息,携带了第六指示信息,第六指示信息用于指示终端设备具有第二用户身份的logged MDT或无线链路失败信息或接入失败信息(不同的信息可以对应不同的指示信息)。进一步的,网络设备接收到第六RRC消息之后,网络设备可以给终端设备的第一用户身份发送logged MDT请求消息或无线链路失败请求消息或接入失败请求消息,logged MDT请求消息或无线链路失败请求消息或接入失败请求消息用于指示终端设备可以上报第二用户身份的logged MDT或无线链路失败信息或接入失败信息(不同的信息可以对应不同的指示信息),终端设备根据第六指示信息以第一用户身份向网络设备发送第四RRC消息,第四RRC消息包括终端设备的第二用户身份的logged MDT信息或无线链路失败信息或接入失败信息。As an optional embodiment, when the terminal device has not established the RRC connection of the second user identity or has not completed the random access process of the second user identity, the terminal device cannot report the record type of the second user identity to the network device. Minimize drive test (minimization of drive test, MDT) (ie logged MDT) information or wireless link failure information or access failure information. Therefore, the terminal device can send the fourth RRC message to the network device as the first user. 4. The RRC message includes the logged MDT information or radio link failure information or access failure information of the second user identity of the terminal device (different information can be carried in different cell positions), so that logging of the second user identity can be avoided MDT information or wireless link failure information or access failure information is out of date and invalid or deleted. Optionally, before the terminal device sends the fourth RRC message, the terminal device first sends a sixth RRC message to the network device as the first user, which carries sixth indication information, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device has a second RRC message. The logged MDT or wireless link failure information or access failure information of the user identity (different information can correspond to different indication information). Further, after the network device receives the sixth RRC message, the network device may send a logged MDT request message or a radio link failure request message or an access failure request message, a logged MDT request message or a radio link to the first user identity of the terminal device The path failure request message or the access failure request message is used to instruct the terminal device to report the logged MDT or wireless link failure information or access failure information of the second user identity (different information can correspond to different indication information), and the terminal device can report according to The sixth indication information sends a fourth RRC message to the network device as the first user identity, and the fourth RRC message includes logged MDT information or radio link failure information or access failure information of the second user identity of the terminal device.
作为一个可选实施例,网络设备可能为第一用户身份和第二用户身份都配置了logged MDT测量,可能一个用户身份为RRC_CONNECTE态,一个用户身份为IDLE或RRC_INACTIVE态,而logged MDT只会记录idle和RRC_INACTIVE下记录的信号质量,为了获得更多的MDT测量结果,一个用户身份获得的小区的测量结果也可以作为另外一个用户身份的测量结果。进一步的,终端设备还可以只记录一份logged MDT测量结果,当某个用户身份需要上报logged MDT测量时,则把对应的记录测量结果上报给网络设备。As an optional embodiment, the network device may configure logged MDT measurement for both the first user identity and the second user identity. It is possible that one user identity is in the RRC_CONNECTE state, and the other user identity is in the IDLE or RRC_INACTIVE state, and logged MDT only records For the signal quality recorded under idle and RRC_INACTIVE, in order to obtain more MDT measurement results, the measurement result of the cell obtained by one user identity can also be used as the measurement result of another user identity. Further, the terminal device may also only record a piece of logged MDT measurement results, and when a certain user identity needs to report the logged MDT measurement, the corresponding recorded measurement result is reported to the network device.
可选地,若终端设备支持的第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个网络设备,由于终端设备的位置发生变化或者网络拥塞等原因导致终端设备的服务网络设备需要发生变化,即终端设备的服务网络设备需要从源网络设备切换到目标网络设备时,源网络设备需要向目标网络设备发送第一信息、第二信息和第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示第一信息为第一用户身份的,第二信息为第二用户身份的,目标网络设备可以根据第四指示信息确定第一信息为第一用户身份的第二信息为第二用户身份的。可选地,源网络设备可以将第一信息、第二信息和第四指示信息携带在同一条消息中向目标网络设备发送。例如,第一信息可以为第一用户身份的上下文,第二信息可以为第二用户身份的上下文;又例如,第一信息为第一用户身份协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话资源建立请求,第二信息为第二用户身份的PDU会话建立请求;再例如,第一信息为第一用户身份的PDU会话,第二信息为第二用户身份的PDU会话;再例如,第一信息为第一用户身份的数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB),第二信息为第二用户身份的DRB。Optionally, if the first user identity and the second user identity supported by the terminal device belong to the same network device, the service network device of the terminal device needs to change due to changes in the location of the terminal device or network congestion, that is, the terminal device When the serving network device needs to switch from the source network device to the target network device, the source network device needs to send the first information, the second information, and the fourth instruction information to the target network device. The fourth instruction information is used to indicate that the first information is the first information. For a user identity, the second information is the second user identity, and the target network device may determine, according to the fourth indication information, that the first information is the first user identity and the second information is the second user identity. Optionally, the source network device may carry the first information, the second information, and the fourth indication information in the same message and send it to the target network device. For example, the first information may be the context of the first user identity, and the second information may be the context of the second user identity; for another example, the first information may be the first user identity protocol data unit (PDU) session resource establishment Request, the second information is a request for establishing a PDU session with the second user identity; for another example, the first information is a PDU session with the first user identity, and the second information is a PDU session with the second user identity; for another example, the first information is The data radio bearer (DRB) of the first user identity, and the second information is the DRB of the second user identity.
可选地,在切换的场景下,源网络设备向目标网络设备发送消息1,消息1包括第三信息和第四信息,不同用户身份的信息所在的信元在消息1的不同位置,例如,第一用户身份的第三信息在所在的信元在消息1的位置1,第二用户身份的第四信息所在信元在消息1的位置2。目标网络设备可以根据第三信息和第四信息在消息1中的位置确定第三消息为第一用户身份的,第四信息为第二用户数身份的。例如,第三信息可以为第一用户身份的上下文,第四信息可以为第二用户身份的上下文;又例如,第三信息为第一用户身份的会话资源建立请求,第四信息为第二用户身份的PDU会话建立请求;再例如,第三信息为第一用户身份的PDU会话,第四信息为第二用户身份的PDU会话;再例如,第三信息为第一用户身份的DRB,第四信息为第二用户身份的DRB。Optionally, in a handover scenario, the source network device sends a message 1 to the target network device, and the message 1 includes third information and fourth information, and the information elements of different user identities are located in different positions of the message 1, for example, The cell where the third information of the first user identity is located is at position 1 of message 1, and the cell where the fourth information of the second user identity is located is at position 2 of message 1. The target network device may determine that the third message is the identity of the first user and the fourth information is the identity of the second user according to the positions of the third information and the fourth information in the message 1. For example, the third information may be the context of the identity of the first user, and the fourth information may be the context of the identity of the second user; for another example, the third information is a session resource establishment request of the identity of the first user, and the fourth information is the second user. Identity PDU session establishment request; for another example, the third information is the PDU session of the first user identity, and the fourth information is the PDU session of the second user identity; for another example, the third information is the DRB of the first user identity, and the fourth information is the DRB of the first user identity. The information is the DRB of the second user's identity.
可选地,在切换的场景下,目标网络设备向源网络设备发送响应消息1时,响应消息可以包括第一响应信息、第二响应信息和第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示第一响应信息为第一用户身份的响应信息,第二响应信息为第二用户身份的响应信息。例如,该第一响应信息可以为第一用户身份的PDU会话资源接纳响应,第二响应信息可以为第二用户身份的PDU会话资源接纳响应;又例如,第一响应信息可以为第一用户身份的PDU会话资源拒绝响应,第二响应信息可以为第二用户身份的PDU会话资源拒绝响应。Optionally, in a handover scenario, when the target network device sends a response message 1 to the source network device, the response message may include first response information, second response information, and fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate The first response information is the response information of the first user identity, and the second response information is the response information of the second user identity. For example, the first response information may be a PDU session resource admission response of the first user identity, and the second response information may be a PDU session resource admission response of the second user identity; for another example, the first response information may be the first user identity The PDU session resource rejection response of the PDU, and the second response information may be the PDU session resource rejection response of the second user identity.
可选地,在切换的场景下,目标网络设备向源网络设备发送响应消息1时,响应消息1可以包括第一响应信息、第二响应信息,不同用户身份的信息所在的信元在响应消息1的不同位置,例如,第一用户身份的第一响应信息在所在的信元在响应消息1的位置1,第二用户身份的第二响应信息所在信元在响应消息1的位置2。目标网络设备可以根据第一响应信息、第二响应信息在响应消息1中的位置确定第一响应信息为第一用户身份的,第二响应信息为第二用户数身份的。例如,该第一响应信息可以为第一用户身份的PDU 会话资源接纳响应,第二响应信息可以为第二用户身份的PDU会话资源接纳响应;又例如,第一响应信息可以为第一用户身份的PDU会话资源拒绝响应,第二响应信息可以为第二用户身份的PDU会话资源拒绝响应。Optionally, in a handover scenario, when the target network device sends a response message 1 to the source network device, the response message 1 may include the first response information and the second response information, and the information element containing the information of different user identities is in the response message Different positions of 1, for example, the cell where the first response information of the first user identity is located is at position 1 of the response message 1, and the cell where the second response information of the second user identity is located at position 2 of the response message 1. The target network device may determine that the first response information is the identity of the first user, and the second response information is the identity of the second user according to the positions of the first response information and the second response information in the response message 1. For example, the first response information may be a PDU session resource admission response of the first user identity, and the second response information may be a PDU session resource admission response of the second user identity; for another example, the first response information may be the first user identity The PDU session resource rejection response of the PDU, and the second response information may be the PDU session resource rejection response of the second user identity.
可选地,上述第一用户身份的PDU会话资源接纳响应可能携带第一用户身份的数据转移地址,第二用户身份的PDU会话资源接纳响应中可能携带第二用户身份的数据转移地址。第一用户身份和第二用户身份对应不同的数据转移地址。数据转移地址包括传输层地址、通用分组无线业务隧道协议(GPRS tunnelling protocol,GTP)的隧道端口标识。Optionally, the PDU session resource admission response of the first user identity may carry the data transfer address of the first user identity, and the PDU session resource admission response of the second user identity may carry the data transfer address of the second user identity. The first user identity and the second user identity correspond to different data transfer addresses. The data transfer address includes the transport layer address and the general packet radio service tunneling protocol (GPRS tunnelling protocol, GTP) tunnel port identifier.
因此,本申请实施例中建立RRC连接的方法,终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据第一用户身份的第一RRC消息中包括的配置信息建立第二用户身份的RRC连接,避免终端设备需要以第二用户身份重新发起随机接入,重新独立建立RRC连接,也能避免终端设备以第二用户身份发起随机接入导致失败的情况,有利于提高随机接入的成功率,甚至终端设备不用以第二用户身份发起随机接入直接继承第一用户身份的随机接入,也能够避免随机接入带来的资源开销,从而有利于提高传输性能。Therefore, in the method for establishing an RRC connection in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can establish the RRC connection of the second user identity according to the configuration information included in the first RRC message of the first user identity as the second user identity, avoiding the need for the terminal device to Re-initiating random access as the second user and re-establishing an RRC connection independently can also avoid the failure of the terminal device to initiate random access as the second user, which is beneficial to improve the success rate of random access, even if the terminal device does not use The random access initiated by the second user identity directly inherits the random access of the first user identity, which can also avoid the resource overhead caused by the random access, thereby helping to improve the transmission performance.
下面结合图6-图9描述本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法。下面的方法以网络设备为基站,终端设备的第一用户身份为SIMA/USIMA,终端设备的第二用户身份为SIMB/USIMB进行描述。The method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6-9. The following method is described with the network device as the base station, the first user identity of the terminal device is SIMA/USIMA, and the second user identity of the terminal device is SIMB/USIMB.
应理解,两个SIM可以属于一个UE也可以属于两个UE,本申请实施例对此不作限制。It should be understood that two SIMs may belong to one UE or two UEs, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
图6示出了本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法600,方法600对应前述的情况a),方法600包括:FIG. 6 shows a method 600 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 600 corresponds to the aforementioned situation a), and the method 600 includes:
S610,基站确定终端设备支持SIMA和SIMB,或者SIMA和SIMB属于同一个终端设备。S610: The base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, or SIMA and SIMB belong to the same terminal device.
具体地,S610中基站确定终端设备支持SIMA和SIMB参考前述方法500中网络设备确定终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的方式的描述,为了避免赘述在此不详细描述。Specifically, in S610 that the base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, refer to the description of the manner in which the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity in the aforementioned method 500, which will not be described in detail here to avoid repetition.
S620,基站向终端设备发送SIMA的第一RRC消息,终端设备接收基站发送的第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息包括配置信息,配置信息用于指示SIMB使用SIMA的RRC连接。S620: The base station sends the first RRC message of the SIMA to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the base station. The first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used to instruct the SIMB to use the RRC connection of the SIMA.
需要说明的是,在S620之前默认终端设备的SIMA的RRC连接是建立好的,基站可以在终端设备的SIMA的RRC连接上向终端设备发送任何SIMA的RRC消息,如第一RRC消息。It should be noted that the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device is established by default before S620, and the base station can send any RRC message of the SIMA to the terminal device on the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device, such as the first RRC message.
可选地,S620中的第一RRC消息可以是SIMA的RRC连接释放消息。Optionally, the first RRC message in S620 may be an RRC connection release message of SIMA.
S630,终端设备根据配置信息确定SIMB可以使用SIMA的RRC连接,也可以理解为终端设备根据配置信息确定SIMB可以继承SIMA的RRC连接。S630: The terminal device determines that the SIMB can use the RRC connection of the SIMA according to the configuration information. It can also be understood that the terminal device determines that the SIMB can inherit the RRC connection of the SIMA according to the configuration information.
S640,配置信息可以包括SIMB的协议栈参数和/或密钥信息,终端设备根据SIMB的协议栈参数和/或密钥信息修改SIMA的RRC连接,得到自身的RRC连接。S640: The configuration information may include SIMB protocol stack parameters and/or key information, and the terminal device modifies the SIMA RRC connection according to the SIMB protocol stack parameters and/or key information to obtain its own RRC connection.
例如,SIMB的协议栈参数包括业务数据适应协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层参数、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol control,PDCP)层参数、RLC层参数、MAC层参数和PHY层参数中的至少一种的参数。For example, the SIMB protocol stack parameters include service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer parameters, packet data convergence protocol control (PDCP) layer parameters, RLC layer parameters, MAC layer parameters, and PHY layer parameters At least one of the parameters.
在方法600中,SIMB可以使用SIMA的RRC连接,即在同一时刻SIMA的RRC连接只能被终端设备的一个SIM使用。当然SIMB继承SIMA之后,可以称为该RRC连接为SIMB的RRC连接,SIMA可以再次继承SIMB的RRC连接。In the method 600, the SIMB can use the RRC connection of the SIMA, that is, the RRC connection of the SIMA can only be used by one SIM of the terminal device at the same time. Of course, after the SIMB inherits the SIMA, the RRC connection can be referred to as the RRC connection of the SIMB, and the SIMA can again inherit the RRC connection of the SIMB.
图7示出了本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法700,方法700对应前述的情况b),方法700包括:FIG. 7 shows a method 700 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 700 corresponds to the aforementioned situation b). The method 700 includes:
S710,基站确定终端设备支持SIMA和SIMB,或者SIMA和SIMB属于同一个终端设备。S710: The base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, or SIMA and SIMB belong to the same terminal device.
具体地,S710中基站确定终端设备支持SIMA和SIMB参考前述方法500中网络设备确定终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的方式的描述,为了避免赘述在此不详细描述。Specifically, in S710 that the base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, refer to the description of the manner in which the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity in the foregoing method 500, which will not be described in detail here to avoid repetition.
S720,基站向终端设备的SIMA发送第一RRC消息,终端设备的SIMA接收基站发送的第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息包括配置信息,配置信息包括RACH资源。S720: The base station sends a first RRC message to the SIMA of the terminal device, and the SIMA of the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the base station. The first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information includes RACH resources.
需要说明的是,在S720之前默认终端设备的SIMA的RRC连接是建立好的,基站可以在终端设备的SIMA的RRC连接上向终端设备发送任何SIMA的RRC消息,如第一RRC消息。It should be noted that before S720, the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device is established by default, and the base station can send any SIMA RRC message, such as the first RRC message, to the terminal device on the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device.
可选地,S720中的第一RRC消息可以是SIMA的RRC连接释放消息,也可以是SIMA的RRC重配消息。Optionally, the first RRC message in S720 may be an RRC connection release message of SIMA, or an RRC reconfiguration message of SIMA.
S730,终端设备的SIMB根据配置信息包括的RACH资源向基站发送随机接入前导码(preamble)。例如,RACH资源可以包括随机接入前导索引(随机接入前导索引用于指示随机接入前导)和随机接入资源对应的掩码索引,该掩码索引用于指示发送随机接入前导的时频资源,终端设备的SIMB在掩码索引指示的时频资源上向基站发送随机接入前导码索引指示的随机接入前导码。S730: The SIMB of the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the base station according to the RACH resource included in the configuration information. For example, the RACH resource may include a random access preamble index (the random access preamble index is used to indicate the random access preamble) and a mask index corresponding to the random access resource, and the mask index is used to indicate when the random access preamble is sent. Frequency resources, the SIMB of the terminal device sends the random access preamble indicated by the random access preamble index to the base station on the time-frequency resource indicated by the mask index.
S740,基站接收到终端设备的SIMB发送的随机接入前导码之后,向终端设备的SIMB发送RAR,该RAR携带T-CRNTI、上行授权信息和TA中的至少一种。其中,上行授权信息用于指示发送RRC连接请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息所使用的频域资源,时域资源,以及MCS等信息。S740: After receiving the random access preamble sent by the SIMB of the terminal equipment, the base station sends an RAR to the SIMB of the terminal equipment, where the RAR carries at least one of T-CRNTI, uplink authorization information, and TA. Among them, the uplink grant information is used to indicate information such as frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and MCS used to send an RRC connection request message or send an RRC reestablishment request message or send an RRC recovery request message.
S750,终端设备的SIMB在上行授权信息指示的发送RRC连接请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息的资源上向基站发送RRC连接建立请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息。S750: The SIMB of the terminal device sends an RRC connection establishment request message or an RRC reestablishment request message or an RRC recovery resource to the base station on the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information. Request message.
S760,基站接收到RRC连接建立请求或RRC重建请求消息或者RRC恢复请求消息之后,向终端设备的SIMB发送RRC连接建立(RRC connection setup)消息或发送RRC重建消息或者发送RRC恢复消息,这些RRC消息主要目的是为了向终端设备发送SIMB的无线配置信息。比如RRC连接建立消息中包括基站为终端设备的SIMB配置的无线配置信息,该无线配置信息包括SRB1的协议栈参数。RRC重建消息和RRC恢复消息用于指示恢复之前的配置信息(比如SRB1的协议栈参数)。S760: After receiving the RRC connection establishment request or the RRC reestablishment request message or the RRC recovery request message, the base station sends an RRC connection setup (RRC connection setup) message or sends an RRC reestablishment message or sends an RRC recovery message to the SIMB of the terminal device. These RRC messages The main purpose is to send the wireless configuration information of the SIMB to the terminal device. For example, the RRC connection establishment message includes wireless configuration information configured by the base station for the SIMB of the terminal device, and the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters of SRB1. The RRC reconstruction message and the RRC recovery message are used to indicate the configuration information before recovery (such as the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
S770,终端设备根据无线配置信息配置SRB1的协议栈参数之后,向基站发送RRC连接建立完成(RRC connection setup complete)消息或发送RRC重建完成消息或者发送RRC恢复完成消息,用于指示已经完成建立RRC连接。S770: After configuring the protocol stack parameters of SRB1 according to the wireless configuration information, the terminal device sends an RRC connection setup complete message or sends an RRC reestablishment complete message or sends an RRC recovery complete message to the base station to indicate that the RRC establishment has been completed. connection.
在方法700中,基站可以通过终端设备的SIMA的第一RRC消息发送终端设备的 SIMB的RACH资源,这样避免终端设备需要通过竞争方式进行随机接入,可以降低SIMB的随机接入的时延,也能提高SIMB的随机接入的成功率,有利于提高传输性能。In the method 700, the base station may send the RACH resource of the SIMB of the terminal device through the first RRC message of the SIMA of the terminal device, so as to prevent the terminal device from needing to perform random access in a competitive manner, and reduce the delay of the random access of the SIMB. It can also improve the success rate of SIMB random access, which is beneficial to improving transmission performance.
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法800,方法800对应前述的情况c),方法800包括:FIG. 8 shows a method 800 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 800 corresponds to the aforementioned situation c), and the method 800 includes:
S810,基站确定终端设备支持SIMA和SIMB,或者SIMA和SIMB属于同一个终端设备。S810: The base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, or SIMA and SIMB belong to the same terminal device.
具体地,S810中基站确定终端设备支持SIMA和SIMB参考前述方法500中网络设备确定终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的方式的描述,为了避免赘述在此不详细描述。Specifically, in S810 that the base station determines that the terminal device supports SIMA and SIMB, refer to the description of the manner in which the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity in the aforementioned method 500, which will not be described in detail here to avoid repetition.
S820,基站向终端设备的SIMA发送第一RRC消息,终端设备的SIMA接收基站发送的第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息包括配置信息,配置信息包括建立终端设备的SIMB的上行授权信息和建立终端设备的SIMB的RRC连接的C-RNTI,当然配置信息还可以包括TA。S820: The base station sends a first RRC message to the SIMA of the terminal device, and the SIMA of the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the base station. The first RRC message includes configuration information. The configuration information includes establishment of the SIMB uplink authorization information of the terminal device and establishment of the terminal. The C-RNTI of the RRC connection of the SIMB of the device, of course, the configuration information may also include the TA.
其中,上行授权信息用于指示发送RRC连接请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息的频域资源,时域资源,以及MCS等信息Among them, the uplink grant information is used to indicate the frequency domain resources, time domain resources, and MCS information for sending the RRC connection request message or sending the RRC reestablishment request message or sending the RRC recovery request message.
需要说明的是,在S820之前默认终端设备的SIMA的RRC连接是建立好的,基站可以在终端设备的SIMA的RRC连接上向终端设备发送任何SIMA的RRC消息,如第一RRC消息。It should be noted that before S820, the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device is established by default, and the base station can send any SIMA RRC message, such as the first RRC message, to the terminal device on the RRC connection of the SIMA of the terminal device.
可选地,S820中的第一RRC消息可以是SIMA的RRC连接释放消息,也可以是SIMA的RRC重配消息。Optionally, the first RRC message in S820 may be an RRC connection release message of SIMA, or an RRC reconfiguration message of SIMA.
S830,终端设备的SIMB在上行授权信息指示的发送RRC连接请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息的资源上向基站发送RRC连接建立请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息。S830: The SIMB of the terminal device sends an RRC connection establishment request message or an RRC reestablishment request message or an RRC restoration request message to the base station on the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information for sending an RRC connection request message or sending an RRC reestablishment request message or sending an RRC restoration request message. Request message.
可选地,若配置信息包括TA,终端设备的SIMB在上行授权信息指示的发送RRC连接请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息的资源上按照TA向基站发送RRC连接建立请求消息或发送RRC重建请求消息或者发送RRC恢复请求消息。Optionally, if the configuration information includes TA, the SIMB of the terminal device sends an RRC connection request message or sends an RRC reestablishment request message or sends an RRC recovery request message to the base station according to the resource indicated by the uplink authorization information to send an RRC connection establishment request message to the base station. Either send an RRC reconstruction request message or send an RRC recovery request message.
S840,基站接收到RRC连接建立请求之后,向终端设备的SIMB发送RRC连接建立(RRC connection setup)消息或发送RRC重建消息或者发送RRC恢复消息。这些RRC消息主要目的是为了向终端设备发送SIMB的无线配置信息。比如RRC连接建立消息中包括基站为终端设备的SIMB配置的无线配置信息,该无线配置信息包括SRB1的协议栈参数。RRC重建消息和RRC恢复消息用于指示恢复之前的无线配置信息(比如SRB1的协议栈参数)。S840: After receiving the RRC connection establishment request, the base station sends an RRC connection setup (RRC connection setup) message or an RRC reestablishment message or an RRC recovery message to the SIMB of the terminal device. The main purpose of these RRC messages is to send the wireless configuration information of the SIMB to the terminal device. For example, the RRC connection establishment message includes wireless configuration information configured by the base station for the SIMB of the terminal device, and the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters of SRB1. The RRC reconstruction message and the RRC recovery message are used to indicate the wireless configuration information before the recovery (such as the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
S850,终端设备根据无线配置信息配置SRB1的协议栈参数之后,向基站发送RRC连接建立完成(RRC connection setup complete)消息或发送RRC重建完成消息或者发送RRC恢复完成消息,用于指示已经完成建立RRC连接。S850: After configuring the protocol stack parameters of SRB1 according to the wireless configuration information, the terminal device sends an RRC connection setup complete message or sends an RRC reestablishment complete message or sends an RRC recovery complete message to the base station to indicate that the RRC establishment has been completed. connection.
在方法800中,基站可以通过终端设备的SIMA的第一RRC消息发送终端设备的SIMB的上行授权信息和C-RNTI,这样避免终端设备的SIMB需要向基站发送随机接入前导码,也能避免终端设备需要从基站发送RAR中获取SIMB的上行授权信息和C-RNTI过程,能够降低终端设备的SIMB的随机接入的时延,也能提高SIMB的随机接入的成功 率,有利于提高传输性能。In method 800, the base station can send the uplink authorization information and C-RNTI of the SIMB of the terminal device through the first RRC message of the SIMA of the terminal device. This avoids the need for the SIMB of the terminal device to send a random access preamble to the base station, and also avoids The terminal device needs to obtain the SIMB uplink authorization information and the C-RNTI process from the RAR sent by the base station, which can reduce the delay of the SIMB random access of the terminal device, and can also improve the success rate of the SIMB random access, which is beneficial to improve the transmission performance.
图9示出了本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法900,方法900对应前述的情况d)和e),方法900包括:Fig. 9 shows a method 900 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 900 corresponds to the aforementioned cases d) and e). The method 900 includes:
S910,基站确定终端设备支持USIMA和USIMB,或者USIMA和USIMB属于同一个终端设备。S910: The base station determines that the terminal device supports USIMA and USIMB, or USIMA and USIMB belong to the same terminal device.
具体地,S910中基站确定终端设备支持USIMA和USIMB参考前述方法500中网络设备确定终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份的方式的描述,为了避免赘述在此不详细描述。Specifically, in S910 that the base station determines that the terminal device supports USIMA and USIMB, refer to the description of the manner in which the network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity in the aforementioned method 500, which will not be described in detail here to avoid repetition.
S920,基站向终端设备的USIMA发送第一RRC消息,终端设备的USIMA接收基站发送的第一RRC消息,第一RRC消息包括配置信息,配置信息可以包括USIMB的无线配置信息。无线配置信息包括协议栈参数和/或密钥,终端设备可以在USIMA的当前的无线配置信息的基础上,再根据USIMB的无线配置信息进行修改,从而获得USIMB对应的RRC连接对应的无线配置(比如SRB1的协议栈参数)。S920: The base station sends a first RRC message to the USIMA of the terminal device, and the USIMA of the terminal device receives the first RRC message sent by the base station. The first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the USIMB. The wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters and/or keys. Based on the current wireless configuration information of the USIMA, the terminal device can modify the wireless configuration information of the USIMB to obtain the wireless configuration corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the USIMB ( For example, the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
需要说明的是,在S920之前默认终端设备的USIMA的RRC连接是建立好的,基站可以在终端设备的USIMA的RRC连接上向终端设备发送任何USIMA的RRC消息,如第一RRC消息。It should be noted that the RRC connection of the USIMA of the terminal device is established by default before S920, and the base station can send any RRC message of the USIMA to the terminal device on the RRC connection of the USIMA of the terminal device, such as the first RRC message.
可选地,S920中,第一RRC消息可以包括USIMB的NAS消息。Optionally, in S920, the first RRC message may include a USIMB NAS message.
可选地,S920中的第一RRC消息可以是USIMA的RRC连接释放消息,也可以是USIMA的RRC重配消息。Optionally, the first RRC message in S920 may be an RRC connection release message of USIMA, or an RRC reconfiguration message of USIMA.
S930,终端设备确定USIMA的RRC连接是否能被USIMB使用,或者终端设备确定USIMA的第一RRC消息是否可以包括USIMB的RRC消息。S930: The terminal device determines whether the RRC connection of the USIMA can be used by the USIMB, or the terminal device determines whether the first RRC message of the USIMA can include the RRC message of the USIMB.
具体地,S930,可以参考前述方法500中的确定方式。为了避免赘述本申请实施例在此不详细描述。Specifically, in S930, reference may be made to the determination manner in the aforementioned method 500. In order to avoid repeating the description of the embodiments of the present application, detailed descriptions are not provided here.
可选地,若第一RRC消息可以包括USIMB的NAS消息,则终端设备需要确定该NAS消息为USIMB的,具体的确定方式参见方法500中的确定方式,为了避免赘述本申请实施例在此不详细描述。Optionally, if the first RRC message can include a USIMB NAS message, the terminal device needs to determine that the NAS message is USIMB. For a specific determination method, refer to the determination method in method 500. In order to avoid repeating the embodiments of the present application, it will not be described here. Detailed Description.
S940,配置信息可以包括USIMB的无线配置信息,无线配置信息包括协议栈参数和/或密钥。S940: The configuration information may include wireless configuration information of the USIMB, and the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters and/or keys.
若S930中,终端设备确定USIMA的RRC连接能被USIMB使用,或者终端设备确定USIMA的第一RRC消息可以包括USIMB的RRC消息,终端设备可以在USIMA的当前的无线配置信息的基础上,再根据USIMB的无线配置信息进行修改,从而获得USIMB对应的RRC连接对应的协议栈参数(比如SRB1的协议栈参数)。If in S930, the terminal device determines that the RRC connection of USIMA can be used by USIMB, or the terminal device determines that the first RRC message of USIMA can include the RRC message of USIMB, the terminal device can use the current wireless configuration information of USIMA according to The wireless configuration information of the USIMB is modified to obtain the protocol stack parameters corresponding to the RRC connection corresponding to the USIMB (for example, the protocol stack parameters of SRB1).
可选地,在方法900中,USIMA和USIMB可以具有不同的RRC层实体,该不同的RRC层在同一时刻可以为USIMA和USIMB服务。换句话说,第一RRC消息为USIMA和USIMB的共同RRC消息,则终端设备同时保留USIMA的协议栈参数和USIMB的协议栈参数,和/或,终端设备可以同时保留USIMA的密钥和USIMB的密钥。Optionally, in the method 900, the USIMA and the USIMB may have different RRC layer entities, and the different RRC layers may serve the USIMA and the USIMB at the same time. In other words, if the first RRC message is the common RRC message of USIMA and USIMB, the terminal device retains both the USIMA protocol stack parameters and the USIMB protocol stack parameters, and/or the terminal device can retain both the USIMA key and the USIMB key. Key.
可选地,若USIMA和USIMB可以具有不同的RRC层实体,如图10所示,对于控制面协议,USIMA和USIMB使用不同的RRC层实体(PDCP层实体/RLC层实体/MAC层实体可以相同,也可以不同),USIMA和USIMB使用不同的NAS。如图11,对于用户面 协议,USIMA和USIMB使用不同的SDAP层实体/PDCP层实体/RLC层实体(MAC层实体相同也可以不相同)。或者如图12所示,USIMA和USIMB使用相同的SDAP/PDCP,采用不同的RLC层实体(MAC层实体相同也可以不相同)。Optionally, if USIMA and USIMB can have different RRC layer entities, as shown in Figure 10, for the control plane protocol, USIMA and USIMB use different RRC layer entities (PDCP layer entity/RLC layer entity/MAC layer entity may be the same , Can also be different), USIMA and USIMB use different NAS. As shown in Figure 11, for the user plane protocol, USIMA and USIMB use different SDAP layer entities/PDCP layer entities/RLC layer entities (the same or different MAC layer entities). Or, as shown in FIG. 12, USIMA and USIMB use the same SDAP/PDCP and different RLC layer entities (the same or different MAC layer entities).
可选地,在方法900中,USIMA和USIMB可以具有相同的RRC层实体,该相同的RRC层在在不同的时刻可以为不同的USIMA和USIMB服务,在同一时刻只能为一个USIM服务。即USIMA和USIMB通过时分的方式使用该RRC层。若某一时刻,USIMA的RRC连接只能被USIMB使用,这样终端设备可以将建立USIMA的RRC连接协议栈参数修改为USIMB的协议栈参数,在下一时刻,USIMA可以继续使用该RRC连接,终端设备将USIMB的协议栈参数再修改为USIMA的协议栈参数;或者,在方法900中,某一时刻USIMA的RRC连接只能被USIMB使用,这样终端设备使用USIMB的密钥,在下一时刻,USIMA可以继续使用该RRC连接,终端设备使用USIMA的密钥。Optionally, in method 900, USIMA and USIMB may have the same RRC layer entity, and the same RRC layer may serve different USIMA and USIMB at different times, and only one USIM at the same time. That is, USIMA and USIMB use the RRC layer in a time division manner. If at a certain moment, the RRC connection of USIMA can only be used by USIMB, so that the terminal device can modify the RRC connection protocol stack parameters that establish USIMA to the protocol stack parameters of USIMB. At the next moment, USIMA can continue to use the RRC connection, and the terminal device Modify the USIMB protocol stack parameters to the USIMA protocol stack parameters; or, in method 900, the RRC connection of the USIMA can only be used by the USIMB at a certain time, so that the terminal device uses the USIMB key. At the next moment, the USIMA can Continue to use the RRC connection, and the terminal device uses the USIMA key.
可选地,若USIMA和USIMB可以具有相同的RRC层实体,对于控制面协议,如图13所示,USIMA和USIMB使用相同的RRC层实体/PDCP层实体/RLC层实体(甚至MAC层实体也相同),USIMA和USIMB使用不同的NAS。对于用户面协议,如图11所示,USIMA和USIMB使用不同的SDAP层实体/PDCP层实体/RLC层实体(MAC层实体相同也可以不相同);或者对于用户面协议,USIMA和USIMB使用相同的SDAP层实体/PDCP层实体,采用不同的RLC层实体(MAC层实体相同也可以不相同)Optionally, if USIMA and USIMB can have the same RRC layer entity, for the control plane protocol, as shown in Figure 13, USIMA and USIMB use the same RRC layer entity/PDCP layer entity/RLC layer entity (even the MAC layer entity is also Same), USIMA and USIMB use different NAS. For user plane protocols, as shown in Figure 11, USIMA and USIMB use different SDAP layer entities/PDCP layer entities/RLC layer entities (the MAC layer entities may be the same or different); or for user plane protocols, USIMA and USIMB use the same The SDAP layer entity/PDCP layer entity adopts different RLC layer entities (the same or different MAC layer entities)
在方法900中,USIMA和USIMB可以共同使用终端设备以USIMA建立的RRC连接,例如通过在同一个RRC消息中携带两个USIM卡的信息,或者USIMA和USIMB可以通过时分的复用方式使用终端设备以USIMA建立的RRC连接。这样,终端设备就不需要专门为USIMB建立RRC连接,可以降低RRC连接的数量,同时终端设备也不需要为USIMB发起随机接入过程,能够避免信令开销,有利于提高传输性能。In method 900, USIMA and USIMB can use terminal equipment to establish an RRC connection with USIMA, for example, by carrying the information of two USIM cards in the same RRC message, or USIMA and USIMB can use terminal equipment in a time-division multiplexing manner RRC connection established with USIMA. In this way, the terminal device does not need to specifically establish RRC connections for the USIMB, which can reduce the number of RRC connections. At the same time, the terminal device does not need to initiate a random access procedure for the USIMB, which can avoid signaling overhead and help improve transmission performance.
下面结合方法1400,描述本申请实施例提供的传输MDT信息的方法,如图14所示,方法1400包括:The following describes the method for transmitting MDT information provided by the embodiment of the present application in conjunction with the method 1400. As shown in FIG. 14, the method 1400 includes:
S1410,终端设备利用SIMA的RRC连接向基站发送具有SIMB的MDT信息的第六指示信息,即该第六指示信息用于指示终端设备具有SIMB的MDT信息,基站接收到第六指示信息之后可以获知终端设备具有SIMB的MDT信息。S1410: The terminal device uses the SIMA RRC connection to send sixth indication information with SIMB MDT information to the base station, that is, the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device has SIMB MDT information, and the base station can learn after receiving the sixth indication information The terminal device has the MDT information of the SIMB.
其中,MDT信息为终端设备以SIMB的身份进行测量得到的测量结果,测量结果反应了当前网络覆盖状况,例如,终端设备以SIMB身份收集当前小区和邻小区的信号质量。Among them, the MDT information is the measurement result obtained by the terminal device using the SIMB identity to measure, and the measurement result reflects the current network coverage status. For example, the terminal device uses the SIMB identity to collect the signal quality of the current cell and neighboring cells.
例如,该第六指示信息可以在RRC建立完成(RRCsetupcomplete)消息、RRC重选完成(RRCresumecomplete)消息、RRC重配完成(RRCreconfigurationcomplete)消息或RRC重建立完成(RRCretablishmentcomplete)消息中携带。For example, the sixth indication information may be carried in an RRC setup complete (RRCsetupcomplete) message, an RRC reselection complete (RRCresumecomplete) message, an RRC reconfiguration complete (RRCreconfigurationcomplete) message, or an RRC retablishmentcomplete (RRCretablishmentcomplete) message.
可选地,第六指示信息还可以指示具有SIMB的无线链路失败或者接入失败等记录信息的指示信息。Optionally, the sixth indication information may also indicate indication information with SIMB radio link failure or access failure and other record information.
S1420,基站利用SIMA的RRC连接向终端设备发送MDT请求消息,该MDT请求消息用于请求终端设备发送SIMB的MDT信息。S1420: The base station uses the RRC connection of the SIMA to send an MDT request message to the terminal device, where the MDT request message is used to request the terminal device to send the MDT information of the SIMB.
例如,基站需要终端设备上报SIMB的MDT信息时,可以向终端设备发送MDT请求消息。For example, when the base station needs the terminal device to report the MDT information of the SIMB, it can send an MDT request message to the terminal device.
可选地,基站还可以向终端设备发送请求上报SIMB的无线链路失败或者接入失败等 记录信息。Optionally, the base station may also send a request to report record information such as a wireless link failure or access failure of the SIMB to the terminal device.
S1430,终端设备向基站发送第四RRC消息,该第四RRC消息中包括SIMB的MDT信息。S1430: The terminal device sends a fourth RRC message to the base station, where the fourth RRC message includes the MDT information of the SIMB.
可选地,第四RRC消息还可以包括SIMB的无线链路失败或者接入失败等记录信息。作为S1420和S1430可替换的方式,基站向终端设备发送MDT请求消息,该MDT请求消息可以携带第七指示信息,该第七指示信息用于指示终端设备上报哪个SIM卡的MDT信息,终端设备向基站发送的第四RRC消息中携带第七指示信息所指示的SIM的MDT信息,例如第七指示信息指示终端设备上报SIMA的MDT信息,则终端设备在第四RRC消息中上报SIMA的MDT信息,又例如,第七指示信息指示终端设备上报SIMB的MDT信息,则终端设备在第四消息中上报SIMB的MDT信息。Optionally, the fourth RRC message may also include record information such as a radio link failure or access failure of the SIMB. As an alternative to S1420 and S1430, the base station sends an MDT request message to the terminal device. The MDT request message may carry seventh indication information. The seventh indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to report the MDT information of which SIM card. The fourth RRC message sent by the base station carries the MDT information of the SIM indicated by the seventh indication information. For example, the seventh indication information indicates that the terminal device reports the MDT information of the SIMA, and the terminal device reports the MDT information of the SIMA in the fourth RRC message. For another example, if the seventh indication information indicates that the terminal device reports the MDT information of the SIMB, the terminal device reports the MDT information of the SIMB in the fourth message.
作为S1420和S1430另一可替换的方式,基站向终端设备发送MDT请求消息,该MDT请求消息用于向终端设备请求上报MDT信息,终端设备可以通过第四RRC消息向基站上报SIMA的MDT信息1和SIMB的MDT信息2,并且第四RRC消息可以携带第八指示信息和第九指示信息,第八指示信息用于指示MDT信息1为SIMA的,第九指示信息用于指示MDT信息2为SIMB的。As an alternative to S1420 and S1430, the base station sends an MDT request message to the terminal device. The MDT request message is used to request the terminal device to report the MDT information. The terminal device can report the SIMA MDT information to the base station through the fourth RRC message. And SIMB MDT information 2, and the fourth RRC message can carry eighth indication information and ninth indication information. The eighth indication information is used to indicate that MDT information 1 is SIMA, and the ninth indication information is used to indicate that MDT information 2 is SIMB. of.
若终端设备的SIMA和SIMB属于不同的基站,可能两个SIM的基站会为同一个终端设备的两个SIM配置不同的测量配置,例如测量间隔(gap)配置,则终端设备需要为两个SIM分别进行盲检测,由于终端设备的测量能力有限,则会导致两个基站为两个SIM配置的测量gap超过终端设备的测量能力,造成终端设备无法进行测量,下面结合图15描述本申请实施例提供的上报测量配置的方法1500,方法1500包括:If the SIMA and SIMB of the terminal device belong to different base stations, the base stations of the two SIMs may configure different measurement configurations for the two SIMs of the same terminal device, such as the measurement interval (gap) configuration, then the terminal device needs to be two SIMs Blind detection is performed separately. Due to the limited measurement capability of the terminal device, the measurement gap configured by the two base stations for the two SIMs will exceed the measurement capability of the terminal device, causing the terminal device to be unable to perform measurement. The following describes the embodiment of the application with reference to FIG. 15 A method 1500 for reporting measurement configuration is provided, and the method 1500 includes:
S1510,终端设备向SIMB的基站发送SIMA的测量配置,SIMB的基站接收SIMA的测量配置。S1510: The terminal device sends the SIMA measurement configuration to the SIMB base station, and the SIMB base station receives the SIMA measurement configuration.
具体地,SIMA的测量配置包括SIMA的gap类型(是终端设备级别的GAP类型,还是频点范围1(frequency rang 1,FR1)级别的GAP类型,还是频点范围2(frequency rang 2,FR2)级别的GAP)、gap的时间信息、测量频点、测量导频信号的类型、测量导频信号对应的子载波间隔和测量上报事件的数目等中的至少一项。Specifically, the measurement configuration of SIMA includes the gap type of SIMA (Is it a terminal device level GAP type, or a frequency range 1 (frequency rang 1, FR1) level GAP type, or frequency range 2 (frequency rang 2, FR2) Level GAP), at least one of gap time information, measurement frequency, measurement pilot signal type, subcarrier interval corresponding to the measurement pilot signal, and the number of measurement report events.
S1520,SIMB的基站根据终端设备上报的SIMA的测量配置确定SIMB的测量配置。S1520: The base station of the SIMB determines the measurement configuration of the SIMB according to the measurement configuration of the SIMA reported by the terminal device.
USIM B的基站收到USIMA的配置信息之后,基站根据终端设备的总能力以及上报的USIM A的配置信息,为USIM B确定测量配置的上限,从而保证了USIM A和USIM B的总测量配置不会超过终端设备的总测量能力。After the base station of USIM B receives the configuration information of USIMA, the base station determines the upper limit of the measurement configuration for USIM B according to the total capabilities of the terminal equipment and the reported configuration information of USIM A, thereby ensuring that the total measurement configuration of USIM A and USIM B is different. Will exceed the total measurement capability of the terminal device.
S1530,SIMB的基站将确定的SIMB的测量配置发送给终端设备,终端设备根据SIMB的测量配置进行测量。S1530: The base station of the SIMB sends the determined measurement configuration of the SIMB to the terminal device, and the terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration of the SIMB.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,终端设备以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接可以被第一用户身份和第二用户身份同时使用,则终端设备与网络设备在第一用户身份的RRC链路上传输的信息可能是第一用户身份的也可能是第二用户身份的,因此,终端设备与网络设备要区分传输的信息为第一用身份的还第二用户身份的,终端设备与网络设备可以通过显示指示,如直接通过指示信息指示传输的信息为第一用户身份的还是第二用户身份的;或者终端设备与网络设备可以通过隐式指示,如不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,不同的BWP对应不同的用户身份,不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份等等。因此, 任何利用第一用户身份建立的RRC连接传输两个用户身份的信息时,通过显示指示或隐式指示区分该信息为哪个用户身份的都落在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。It should be noted that in this embodiment of the application, the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user identity can be used by the first user identity and the second user identity at the same time, and the terminal device and the network device are in the RRC chain of the first user identity. The information transmitted on the road may be the identity of the first user or the identity of the second user. Therefore, the terminal device and the network device should distinguish between the information transmitted as the first user identity and the second user identity. The terminal device and the network The device can display instructions, such as direct instructions to indicate whether the transmitted information is the first user identity or the second user identity; or the terminal device and the network device can use implicit instructions, such as different logical channels corresponding to different user identities , Different BWPs correspond to different user identities, and different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and so on. Therefore, when any RRC connection established by using the first user identity transmits information of two user identities, it is within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application to distinguish which user identity the information belongs to by a display instruction or an implicit instruction.
也需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,SIMA和SIMB的服务基站可以相同也可以不同,若SIMA和SIMB的服务基站不同,则SIMA的基站可以和SIMB的基站交互,从而可以达到建立SIMB的RRC连接的目的,例如终端设备向SIMA的基站发送的第一RRC消息中可以携带SIMB的基站标识,SIMA的基站可以向SIMB的基站标识对应的基站发送信息,例如发送用于请求SIMB的协议栈参数和SIMB密钥的信息。为了避免赘述本申请实施例不再详细描述SIMA与SIMB的服务基站不同的情况,本领域的技术人员结合本申请实施例描述的方法可以得到SIMA与SIMB的服务基站不同的方法。It should also be noted that in this embodiment of the application, the serving base stations of SIMA and SIMB may be the same or different. If the serving base stations of SIMA and SIMB are different, then the base station of SIMA can interact with the base station of SIMB, so as to achieve the establishment of SIMB. The purpose of the RRC connection, for example, the first RRC message sent by the terminal device to the base station of SIMA can carry the base station identity of SIMB, and the base station of SIMA can send information to the base station corresponding to the base station identity of SIMB, for example, send a protocol stack for requesting SIMB. Parameters and SIMB key information. In order to avoid repeating the description of the embodiments of the present application, the situation that the serving base stations of SIMA and SIMB are different will not be described in detail. Those skilled in the art can obtain different methods of serving base stations of SIMA and SIMB in combination with the methods described in the embodiments of the present application.
进一步地,SIMA和SIMB的服务小区也可以相同或者不同,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Further, the serving cells of SIMA and SIMB may also be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
也需要说明的是,为了清楚描述本申请实施例的方案,上述实施例中以终端设备同时支持SIMA和SIMB描述,实际应用中,SIMA和SIMB可以属于不同的终端设备,例如,SIMA的终端设备可以和SIMB的终端设备之间有相互通信交互,比如SIMA的终端设备和SIMB的终端设备通过有线或无线(比如WIFI)进行交互。It should also be noted that, in order to clearly describe the solution of the embodiments of the present application, in the above embodiments, the terminal device supports both SIMA and SIMB. In practical applications, SIMA and SIMB can belong to different terminal devices, for example, SIMA terminal devices. There can be mutual communication and interaction with SIMB terminal devices, for example, SIMA terminal devices and SIMB terminal devices interact through wired or wireless (such as WIFI).
也需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的配置信息包括无线配置信息,即配置信息包括终端设备发起随机接入或者建立RRC连接的任何配置,无线配置信息包括用于建立SRB1的协议栈参数。It should also be noted that the configuration information in the embodiment of the present application includes wireless configuration information, that is, the configuration information includes any configuration for a terminal device to initiate random access or establish an RRC connection, and the wireless configuration information includes protocol stack parameters for establishing SRB1.
以上结合图1至图15,详细得描述了本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的方法,下面结合图16至图18,详细描述本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的装置。The method for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application is described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 15. The following describes in detail the apparatus for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.
图16示出了本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的装置1600的示意性框图,该装置1600可以对应上述方法中描述的终端设备,也可以对应终端设备的芯片或者组件,并且,该装置1600中各个模块或者单元分别可以用于执行上述方法中终端设备所执行的各动作或处理过程,如图16所示,该建立RRC连接的装置1600支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份,该装置1600可以包括收发单元1610和建立单元1620。FIG. 16 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 1600 for establishing an RRC connection provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus 1600 may correspond to the terminal device described in the foregoing method, or may correspond to the chip or component of the terminal device, and the apparatus 1600 Each module or unit in the above method can be used to execute each action or process performed by the terminal device in the above method. As shown in FIG. 16, the apparatus 1600 for establishing an RRC connection supports the first user identity and the second user identity. The 1600 may include a transceiving unit 1610 and a establishing unit 1620.
收发单元1610,用于以所述第一用户身份从网络设备接收所述第一用户身份的第一无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括配置信息,所述配置信息用于所述装置1600以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接;The transceiver unit 1610 is configured to receive a first radio resource control RRC message of the first user identity from a network device as the first user identity, where the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used for the The apparatus 1600 establishes an RRC connection with the identity of the second user;
建立单元1620,用于以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接。The establishment unit 1620 is configured to establish an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user.
作为一个可选实施例,所述配置信息包括用于建立单元1620以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的随机接入信道RACH资源、用于建立单元1620以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于建立单元1620以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI中的至少一种。As an optional embodiment, the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource for the establishment unit 1620 to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user, and a establishment unit 1620 to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user. At least one of the uplink authorization information and the temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of the cell used for the establishment unit 1620 to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user.
作为一个可选实施例,所述配置信息用于指示装置1600以所述第二用户身份使用装置1600以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接;As an optional embodiment, the configuration information is used to instruct the apparatus 1600 to use the RRC connection established by the apparatus 1600 as the first user as the second user;
建立单元1620具体用于:根据所述配置信息以所述第二用户身份使用所述装置1600以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The establishing unit 1620 is specifically configured to use the apparatus 1600 to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the first user using the identity of the second user according to the configuration information.
作为一个可选实施例,建立单元1620具体用于:根据所述配置信息以第二用户身份使用装置1600以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,装置1600以第一用户身份能够使用装 置1600以第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。As an optional embodiment, the establishing unit 1620 is specifically configured to use the RRC connection established by the apparatus 1600 as the first user as the second user according to the configuration information, and the apparatus 1600 can use the apparatus 1600 as the first user as the first user. An RRC connection established by a user identity.
作为一个可选实施例,所述第一RRC消息包括装置1600的所述第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,所述第二RRC消息包括所述配置信息,所述装置1600还包括:As an optional embodiment, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the apparatus 1600, the second RRC message includes the configuration information, and the apparatus 1600 further includes:
确定单元,用于根据所述第一RRC消息包括的所述第二RRC消息确定所述装置1600能够以第二用户身份使用所述装置1600以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The determining unit is configured to determine, according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message, that the apparatus 1600 can use the RRC connection established by the apparatus 1600 in the identity of the first user as the second user.
作为一个可选实施例,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的所述配置信息用于装置1600以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接,所述确定单元还用于根据所述第一指示信息确定所述装置1600能够以第二用户身份使用装置1600以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。As an optional embodiment, the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used by the apparatus 1600 to communicate with the second user The identity establishes an RRC connection, and the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the first indication information, that the apparatus 1600 can use the RRC connection established by the apparatus 1600 with the identity of the first user as the second user.
作为一个可选实施例,所述确定单元还用于根据所述配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息中的位置确定所述装置1600能够以第二用户身份使用装置1600以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,装置1600的不同用户身份的配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置。As an optional embodiment, the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the position of the cell where the configuration information is located in the first RRC message, that the apparatus 1600 can use the apparatus 1600 as the second user. For the RRC connection established by the first user identity, the cells in which the configuration information of the different user identities of the apparatus 1600 are located are in different positions in the first RRC message.
作为一个可选实施例,所述第一RRC消息包括对应关系,所述对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于装置1600确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。As an optional embodiment, the first RRC message includes a correspondence, and the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate that different logical channels of the same bearer correspond to different logical channels. Different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship It is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used by the apparatus 1600 to determine the first user identity or The identity of the second user.
作为一个可选实施例,所述配置信息还包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数和所述第二用户身份的密钥信息中的至少一种。As an optional embodiment, the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
作为一个可选实施例,所述收发单元1610还用于以第一用户身份从所述网络设备接收第三RRC消息,所述第三RRC消息包括第一寻呼信息,所述第一寻呼信息携带所述装置1600的所述第二用户身份的标识。As an optional embodiment, the transceiving unit 1610 is further configured to receive a third RRC message from the network device as the first user, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging information The information carries the identifier of the second user identity of the device 1600.
作为一个可选实施例,所述收发单元1610还用于在所述以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接之前,以所述第一用户身份向所述网络设备发送第四RRC消息,所述第四RRC消息包括装置1600的所述第二用户身份的最小化路测MDT信息。As an optional embodiment, the transceiving unit 1610 is further configured to send a fourth user as the first user to the network device before establishing an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user. An RRC message, where the fourth RRC message includes MDT minimized drive test information of the second user identity of the apparatus 1600.
作为一个可选实施例,所述第一RRC消息为RRC释放消息或者RRC重配置消息,所述RRC释放消息用于指示释放装置1600的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接或者用于指示装置1600的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接进入非激活态。As an optional embodiment, the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC release message is used to indicate to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the apparatus 1600 or to indicate the apparatus 1600 The RRC connection of the first user identity enters an inactive state.
应理解,装置1600中各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程请参照前文中结合图5-图15的方法实施例的描述,为了简洁,这里不加赘述。It should be understood that, for the specific process of each unit in the apparatus 1600 executing the above corresponding steps, please refer to the description of the method embodiments in FIG. 5 to FIG.
图17示出了本申请实施例提供的建立RRC连接的装置1700的示意性框图,该装置1700可以对应上述方法中描述的网络设备或基站,也可以对应网络设备或基站的芯片或者组件,并且,该装置1700中各个模块或者单元分别可以用于执行上述方法中网络设备或基站所执行的各动作或处理过程,如图17所示,该建立RRC连接的装置1700可以包括获取单元1710和收发单元1720。FIG. 17 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 1700 for establishing an RRC connection according to an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus 1700 may correspond to the network equipment or base station described in the above method, and may also correspond to the chip or component of the network equipment or base station, and Each module or unit in the apparatus 1700 may be used to execute each action or processing performed by the network equipment or base station in the above method. As shown in FIG. 17, the apparatus 1700 for establishing an RRC connection may include an acquiring unit 1710 and a transceiver. Unit 1720.
获取单元1710用于获取配置信息,所述配置信息用于终端设备以第二用户身份建立 无线资源控制RRC连接;The obtaining unit 1710 is configured to obtain configuration information, where the configuration information is used by the terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as the second user;
收发单元1720用于向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括所述配置信息。The transceiver unit 1720 is configured to send a first RRC message to a terminal device with a first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
作为一个可选实施例,所述装置1700还包括确定单元,用于在所述向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一RRC消息之前,确定所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份。As an optional embodiment, the apparatus 1700 further includes a determining unit, configured to determine that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the first user identity before the first RRC message is sent to the first user identity terminal device. The second user identity.
作为一个可选实施例,所述配置信息包括用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的随机接入信道RACH资源、用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI中的至少一种。As an optional embodiment, the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource used for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity, and a random access channel RACH resource used for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the second user identity. At least one of the uplink authorization information of the RRC connection and the temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of the cell used for the terminal device to establish the RRC connection with the identity of the second user.
作为一个可选实施例,所述配置信息用于指示所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。As an optional embodiment, the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device as the second user to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device as the first user.
作为一个可选实施例,所述第一RRC消息包括所述终端设备的第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,所述第二RRC消息包括所述配置信息。As an optional embodiment, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes the configuration information.
作为一个可选实施例,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的配置信息用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接。As an optional embodiment, the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used by the terminal device to communicate with the second user. The identity establishes the RRC connection.
作为一个可选实施例,所述第一RRC消息包括对应关系,所述对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述第对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。As an optional embodiment, the first RRC message includes a correspondence, and the correspondence is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence is used to indicate that different logical channels of the same bearer correspond to different logical channels. Different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the first correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence The relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the corresponding relationship is used for the terminal device to determine the first User identity or said second user identity.
作为一个可选实施例,所述配置信息还包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数和所述第二用户身份的密钥信息中的至少一种。As an optional embodiment, the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity.
作为一个可选实施例,若所述配置信息包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数,所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数为无线链路控制RLC层参数、媒体接入控制MAC层参数或物理PHY层参数中的至少一种时,所述获取单元1710还用于向分布单元DU发送请求消息,所述请求消息用于请求所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数。As an optional embodiment, if the configuration information includes the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity, the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity are radio link control RLC layer parameters and media access control MAC layer parameters Or at least one of the physical PHY layer parameters, the acquiring unit 1710 is further configured to send a request message to the distribution unit DU, where the request message is used to request the protocol stack parameter of the second user identity.
作为一个可选实施例,所述收发单元1720还用于向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三RRC消息,所述第三RRC消息包括第一寻呼信息,所述第一寻呼信息携带所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的标识。As an optional embodiment, the transceiving unit 1720 is further configured to send a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging information The information carries the identifier of the second user identity of the terminal device.
作为一个可选实施例,所述收发单元1720还用于接收所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送的第四RRC消息,所述第四RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的最小化路测MDT信息;As an optional embodiment, the transceiving unit 1720 is further configured to receive a fourth RRC message sent by the terminal device of the first user identity, where the fourth RRC message includes the second user identity of the terminal device Minimize drive test MDT information;
所述确定单元还用于根据所述第四RRC消息确定所述第二用户身份的MDT信息。The determining unit is further configured to determine the MDT information of the second user identity according to the fourth RRC message.
作为一个可选实施例,所述第一RRC消息为RRC释放消息或者RRC重配置消息,所述RRC释放消息用于指示释放所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接或者用于 指示所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进入RRC非激活态。As an optional embodiment, the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC release message is used to instruct to release the RRC connection of the first user identity of the terminal device or to indicate The first user identity of the terminal device enters an RRC inactive state.
应理解,装置1700中各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程请参照前文中结合图5-图15的方法实施例的描述,为了简洁,这里不加赘述。It should be understood that, for the specific process of each unit in the device 1700 performing the above corresponding steps, please refer to the description of the method embodiments in FIG. 5 to FIG.
上述各个方案的装置1600具有实现上述方法中终端设备执行的相应步骤的功能,上述各个方案的装置1700具有实现上述方法中网络设备执行的相应步骤的功能;功能可以通过硬件或软件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块;例如发送单元可以由通信接口替代,接收单元可以由通信接口替代,其它单元,如确定单元等可以由处理器替代,分别执行各个方法实施例中的收发操作以及相关的处理操作。在本申请实施例中,一个装置的通信接口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性的,通信接口可以是发射机、接收机、收发器、电路、总线、模块、管脚或其它类型的通信接口,本申请实施例不做限制。The apparatus 1600 of each of the foregoing solutions has the function of implementing the corresponding steps performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method, and the apparatus 1700 of each of the foregoing solutions has the function of implementing the corresponding steps performed by the network device in the foregoing method; the functions can be implemented by hardware or software, or The corresponding software is implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions; for example, the sending unit can be replaced by a communication interface, the receiving unit can be replaced by a communication interface, and other units, such as the determining unit, can be replaced by a processor to execute each method separately Transceiving operations and related processing operations in the embodiment. In the embodiment of the present application, the communication interface of a device is used for the device to communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the communication interface may be a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or another type of communication interface, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在具体实现过程中,处理器可用于进行,例如但不限于,基带相关处理,通信接口可用于进行,例如但不限于,信息交互。上述器件可以分别设置在彼此独立的芯片上,也可以至少部分的或者全部的设置在同一块芯片上。例如,处理器可以进一步划分为模拟基带处理器和数字基带处理器,其中模拟基带处理器可以与通信接口集成在同一块芯片上,数字基带处理器可以设置在独立的芯片上。随着集成电路技术的不断发展,可以在同一块芯片上集成的器件越来越多,例如,数字基带处理器可以与多种应用处理器(例如但不限于图形处理器,多媒体处理器等)集成在同一块芯片之上。这样的芯片可以称为系统芯片(system on chip,SOC)。将各个器件独立设置在不同的芯片上,还是整合设置在一个或者多个芯片上,往往取决于产品设计的具体需要。本申请实施例对上述器件的具体实现形式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the processor can be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, baseband related processing, and the communication interface can be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, information exchange. The above-mentioned devices may be respectively arranged on separate chips, or at least part or all of them may be arranged on the same chip. For example, the processor can be further divided into an analog baseband processor and a digital baseband processor, where the analog baseband processor and the communication interface can be integrated on the same chip, and the digital baseband processor can be set on a separate chip. With the continuous development of integrated circuit technology, more and more devices can be integrated on the same chip. For example, a digital baseband processor can be combined with a variety of application processors (such as but not limited to graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.) Integrated on the same chip. Such a chip may be called a system on chip (SOC). Whether each device is arranged independently on different chips or integrated on one or more chips often depends on the specific needs of product design. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation form of the foregoing device.
可以理解的是,对于前述实施例中所涉及的处理器可以通过具有处理器和通信接口的硬件平台执行程序指令来分别实现其在本申请前述实施例中任一设计中涉及的功能,基于此,如图18所示,本申请实施例提供了一种建立RRC连接的装置1800的示意性框图,装置1800包括:处理器1810、通信接口1820和存储器1830。其中,处理器1810、通信接口1820和存储器1830耦合以互相通信,该存储器1830用于存储指令,该处理器1810用于执行该存储器1830存储的指令,以控制该通信接口1820发送信号和/或接收信号。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。It can be understood that the processor involved in the foregoing embodiments can execute program instructions through a hardware platform with a processor and a communication interface to implement the functions involved in any design of the foregoing embodiments of the present application, based on this As shown in FIG. 18, an embodiment of the present application provides a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 1800 for establishing an RRC connection. The apparatus 1800 includes a processor 1810, a communication interface 1820, and a memory 1830. The processor 1810, the communication interface 1820, and the memory 1830 are coupled to communicate with each other. The memory 1830 is used to store instructions, and the processor 1810 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 1830 to control the communication interface 1820 to send signals and/or receive signal. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
其中,在一种可能的实现方式中,若该装置1800为终端设备,通信接口1820用于以所述第一用户身份从网络设备接收所述第一用户身份的第一无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括配置信息,所述配置信息用于所述装置1800以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接;处理器1810,用于以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接。Wherein, in a possible implementation manner, if the apparatus 1800 is a terminal device, the communication interface 1820 is configured to receive the first radio resource control RRC message of the first user identity from the network device as the first user identity, The first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used by the apparatus 1800 to establish an RRC connection as the second user; the processor 1810 is configured to establish an RRC connection as the second user according to the configuration information. RRC connection.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若该装置1800为网络设备,通信接口1820用于获取配置信息,所述配置信息用于终端设备以第二用户身份建立无线资源控制RRC连接;通信接口1820还用于向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括所述配置信息。In a possible implementation manner, if the apparatus 1800 is a network device, the communication interface 1820 is used to obtain configuration information, and the configuration information is used by the terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as the second user; the communication interface 1820 also Used to send a first RRC message to a terminal device with a first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
应理解,本申请实施例图16中的装置或图17中的装置可以通过图18中的装置1800来实现,并且可以用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备以及网络设备对应的各个步骤和/ 或流程。It should be understood that the apparatus in FIG. 16 or the apparatus in FIG. 17 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by the apparatus 1800 in FIG. 18, and may be used to execute the respective steps and/or corresponding terminal equipment and network equipment in the foregoing method embodiments. Or process.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例描述的各种设计涉及的方法,流程,操作或者步骤,能够以一一对应的方式,通过计算机软件,电子硬件,或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来一一对应实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件,比如,考虑通用性好成本低软硬件解耦等方面,可以采纳执行程序指令的方式来实现,又比如,考虑系统性能和可靠性等方面,可以采纳使用专用电路来实现。普通技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,此处不做限定。It is understandable that the methods, processes, operations, or steps involved in the various designs described in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in a one-to-one correspondence manner through computer software, electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Corresponding realization. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. For example, considering the good versatility, low cost, software and hardware decoupling, etc., they can be implemented by executing program instructions, for example , Considering system performance and reliability, etc., it can be realized by using a dedicated circuit. Ordinary technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, which is not limited here.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行上述实施例中的方法。本申请中的各个实施例也可以互相结合。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method in the above embodiment . The various embodiments in this application can also be combined with each other.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读解释存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行上述实施例中的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable medium, the computer-readable interpretation stores a program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method in the above-mentioned embodiment .
本申请实施例还提供了建立RRC连接系统,包括图16的装置1600和图17的装置1700。或者该系统包括图18中的两种可能的实现方式中的装置。The embodiment of the present application also provides a system for establishing an RRC connection, including the apparatus 1600 in FIG. 16 and the apparatus 1700 in FIG. 17. Or the system includes the devices in the two possible implementation manners shown in FIG. 18.
在本申请实施例中,应注意,本申请实施例上述的方法实施例可以应用于处理器中,或者由处理器实现。处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。In the embodiments of the present application, it should be noted that the foregoing method embodiments in the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a processor or implemented by a processor. The processor may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The foregoing processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。RAM有多种不同的类型,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. There are many different types of RAM, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate Synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random memory Take memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
本申请中出现的术语“第一”、“第二”等仅是为了区分不同的对象,“第一”、“第二”本身并不对其修饰的对象的实际顺序或功能进行限定。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”, “示例”,“例如”,“可选地”或者“在某些实现方式中”的任何实施例或设计方案都不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用这些词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。The terms "first" and "second" appearing in this application are only used to distinguish different objects, and "first" and "second" themselves do not limit the actual order or function of the modified objects. Any embodiment or design solution described as "exemplary", "example", "for example", "optionally" or "in certain implementations" in this application should not be construed as better than other implementations. Examples or design schemes are more preferred or more advantageous. Rather, these words are used to present related concepts in a concrete way.
在本申请中可能出现的对各种消息/信息/设备/网元/系统/装置/操作/等各类客体进行了赋名,可以理解的是,这些具体的名称并不构成对相关客体的限定,所赋名称可随着场景,语境或者使用习惯等因素而变更,对本申请中技术术语的技术含义的理解,应主要从其在技术方案中所体现/执行的功能和技术效果来确定。Various messages/information/equipment/network elements/systems/devices/operations that may appear in this application have been assigned names. It is understandable that these specific names do not constitute a reference to related objects. Limited, the assigned name can be changed according to factors such as the scene, context, or usage habits. The understanding of the technical meaning of the technical terms in this application should be determined mainly from the functions and technical effects embodied/implemented in the technical solution .
上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品可以包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、终端装置或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁盘)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product may include one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a terminal device, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic disk), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。在本申请实施例中,在无逻辑矛盾的前提下,各实施例之间可以相互引用,例如方法实施例之间的方法和/或术语可以相互引用,例如装置实施例之间的功能和/或术语可以相互引用,例如装置实施例和方法实施例之间的功能和/或术语可以相互引用。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here. In the embodiments of the present application, provided that there is no logical contradiction, the embodiments can be mutually cited. For example, the methods and/or terms between the method embodiments can be mutually cited, such as the functions and/or functions between the device embodiments. Or terms may refer to each other, for example, functions and/or terms between the device embodiment and the method embodiment may refer to each other.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各 个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (33)

  1. 一种建立无线资源控制RRC连接的方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于终端设备,所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份,包括:A method for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection, characterized in that the method is applicable to a terminal device, and the terminal device supports a first user identity and a second user identity, and includes:
    所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份从网络设备接收所述第一用户身份的第一无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括配置信息,所述配置信息用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接;The terminal device receives a first radio resource control RRC message of the first user identity from a network device as the first user identity, where the first RRC message includes configuration information, and the configuration information is used for the terminal device Establishing an RRC connection as the second user;
    所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接。The terminal device uses the second user identity to establish an RRC connection according to the configuration information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息包括用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的随机接入信道RACH资源、用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI中的至少一种。The method according to claim 1, wherein the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource used by the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user, and a random access channel RACH resource used by the terminal device to establish an RRC connection. At least one of the uplink authorization information for establishing the RRC connection with the second user identity and the temporary radio network identifier C-RNTI of the cell used for the terminal device to establish the RRC connection with the second user identity.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息用于指示所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接;The method according to claim 1, wherein the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the second user identity to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity;
    其中,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接,包括:Wherein, that the terminal device uses the second user identity to establish an RRC connection according to the configuration information includes:
    所述终端设备根据所述配置信息以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The terminal device uses the RRC connection established by the terminal device in the identity of the first user with the identity of the second user according to the configuration information.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the establishment of the RRC connection by the terminal device as the second user identity according to the configuration information comprises:
    所述终端设备根据所述配置信息以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份能够使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The terminal device uses the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity as the second user according to the configuration information, and the terminal device can use the terminal device with the first user identity An RRC connection established as the first user.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,所述第二RRC消息包括所述配置信息,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, the second RRC message includes the configuration information, and The method also includes:
    所述终端设备根据所述第一RRC消息包括的所述第二RRC消息确定所述终端设备能够以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The terminal device determines, according to the second RRC message included in the first RRC message, that the terminal device can use the second user identity to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity.
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的所述配置信息用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used for the The terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the identity of the second user, and the method further includes:
    所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息确定所述终端设备能够以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, that the terminal device can use the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity as the second user identity.
  7. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备根据所述配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息中的位置确定所述终端设备能够以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接,所述终端设备的不同用户身份的配置信息所在的信元在所述第一RRC消息的不同位置。The terminal device determines, according to the position of the cell where the configuration information is located in the first RRC message, that the terminal device can use the terminal device as the second user to establish the identity of the terminal device as the first user. In the RRC connection, the information elements where the configuration information of the different user identities of the terminal device are located are in different positions of the first RRC message.
  8. 根据权利要求4至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC消息包括 对应关系,所述对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。The method according to any one of claims 4 to 7, wherein the first RRC message includes a corresponding relationship, and the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding The relationship is used to indicate that different logical channels of the same bearer correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate different C-RNTIs. Corresponding to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, the corresponding relationship Used by the terminal device to determine the first user identity or the second user identity.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息还包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数和所述第二用户身份的密钥信息中的至少一种。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity Kind.
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份从所述网络设备接收第三RRC消息,所述第三RRC消息包括第一寻呼信息,所述第一寻呼信息携带所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的标识。The terminal device receives a third RRC message from the network device as the first user, the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging information carries the terminal device’s The identity of the second user.
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份根据所述配置信息建立RRC连接之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, characterized in that, before the terminal device establishes an RRC connection according to the configuration information as the second user, the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份向所述网络设备发送第四RRC消息,所述第四RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的最小化路测MDT信息。The terminal device sends a fourth RRC message to the network device as the first user identity, where the fourth RRC message includes the minimized drive test MDT information of the second user identity of the terminal device.
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC消息为RRC释放消息或者RRC重配置消息,所述RRC释放消息用于指示释放所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接或者用于指示所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接进入非激活态。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC release message is used to instruct to release all of the terminal equipment. The RRC connection of the first user identity or the RRC connection used to indicate the first user identity of the terminal device enters an inactive state.
  13. 一种建立无线资源控制RRC连接的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection, which is characterized in that it includes:
    网络设备获取配置信息,所述配置信息用于终端设备以第二用户身份建立无线资源控制RRC连接;The network device obtains configuration information, where the configuration information is used by the terminal device to establish a radio resource control RRC connection as the second user;
    所述网络设备向第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送第一RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括所述配置信息。The network device sends a first RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the first RRC message includes the configuration information.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述网络设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一RRC消息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein before the network device sends the first RRC message to the terminal device with the first user identity, the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备确定所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份。The network device determines that the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity.
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息包括用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的随机接入信道RACH资源、用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的上行授权信息和用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI中的至少一种。The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the configuration information includes a random access channel RACH resource used for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection as the second user, and used for the terminal device At least one of uplink authorization information for establishing an RRC connection with the identity of the second user and a cell radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI used for the terminal device to establish an RRC connection with the identity of the second user.
  16. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息用于指示所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份使用所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份建立的RRC连接。The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the configuration information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the second user identity to use the RRC connection established by the terminal device with the first user identity.
  17. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的第二RRC消息,所述第二RRC消息包括所述配置信息。The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the first RRC message includes a second RRC message of the second user identity of the terminal device, and the second RRC message includes the configuration information .
  18. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一RRC消息包括的配置信息用于所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份建立RRC连接。The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the first RRC message includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information included in the first RRC message is used for the The terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the identity of the second user.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC消息包括对应关系,所述对应关系用于指示不同的承载对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示同一承载的不同的逻辑信道对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的密钥对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述第对应关系用于指示不同的C-RNTI对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的带宽部分BWP对应不同的用户身份,或者,所述对应关系用于指示不同的子载波间隔对应不同的用户身份,所述对应关系用于所述终端设备确定所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份。The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the first RRC message includes a corresponding relationship, and the corresponding relationship is used to indicate that different bearers correspond to different user identities, or the corresponding relationship is used to indicate Different logical channels of the same bearer correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different keys correspond to different user identities, or the first correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different C-RNTIs correspond to different user identities. User identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different bandwidth parts BWP correspond to different user identities, or the correspondence relationship is used to indicate that different subcarrier intervals correspond to different user identities, and the correspondence relationship is used for all The terminal device determines the first user identity or the second user identity.
  20. 根据权利要求13至19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息还包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数和所述第二用户身份的密钥信息中的至少一种。The method according to any one of claims 13 to 19, wherein the configuration information further includes at least one of a protocol stack parameter of the second user identity and key information of the second user identity Kind.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述配置信息包括所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数,所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数为无线链路控制RLC层参数、媒体接入控制MAC层参数或物理PHY层参数中的至少一种时,所述网络设备获取配置信息,包括:The method according to claim 20, wherein if the configuration information includes the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity, the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity are radio link control RLC layer parameters, media When at least one of the access control MAC layer parameters or the physical PHY layer parameters, the network device acquiring configuration information includes:
    所述网络设备向分布单元DU发送请求消息,所述请求消息用于请求所述第二用户身份的协议栈参数。The network device sends a request message to the distribution unit DU, where the request message is used to request the protocol stack parameters of the second user identity.
  22. 根据权利要求13至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 21, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三RRC消息,所述第三RRC消息包括第一寻呼信息,所述第一寻呼信息携带所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的标识。The network device sends a third RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the third RRC message includes first paging information, and the first paging information carries the second paging information of the terminal device. The identity of the user.
  23. 根据权利要求13至22中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 22, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备接收所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送的第四RRC消息,所述第四RRC消息包括所述终端设备的所述第二用户身份的最小化路测MDT信息;Receiving, by the network device, a fourth RRC message sent by the terminal device of the first user identity, where the fourth RRC message includes the minimized drive test MDT information of the second user identity of the terminal device;
    所述网络设备根据所述第四RRC消息确定所述第二用户身份的MDT信息。The network device determines the MDT information of the second user identity according to the fourth RRC message.
  24. 根据权利要求13至23中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC消息为RRC释放消息或者RRC重配置消息,所述RRC释放消息用于指示释放所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份的RRC连接或者用于指示所述终端设备的所述第一用户身份进入RRC非激活态。The method according to any one of claims 13 to 23, wherein the first RRC message is an RRC release message or an RRC reconfiguration message, and the RRC release message is used to instruct to release all of the terminal device. The RRC connection of the first user identity may be used to indicate that the first user identity of the terminal device enters the RRC inactive state.
  25. 一种建立无线资源控制RRC连接的装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行权利要求1至12中任一项方法的单元。A device for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection, characterized by comprising a unit for executing the method in any one of claims 1-12.
  26. 一种建立无线资源控制RRC连接的装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行权利要求13至24中任一项方法的单元。A device for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection, which is characterized by comprising a unit for executing the method in any one of claims 13 to 24.
  27. 一种建立无线资源控制RRC连接的系统,其特征在于,包括如权利要求25和权利要求26所述的装置。A system for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection, which is characterized by comprising the device according to claim 25 and claim 26.
  28. 一种建立无线资源控制RRC连接的装置,包括存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的程序,其特征在于,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法。A device for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection, including a memory, a processor, and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor, wherein the processor implements rights when the program is executed The method of any one of 1 to 12 is required.
  29. 一种建立无线资源控制RRC连接的装置,包括存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的程序,其特征在于,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现权利要求13至24中任一项所述的方法。A device for establishing a radio resource control RRC connection, including a memory, a processor, and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor, wherein the processor implements rights when the program is executed The method of any one of claims 13-24.
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机 程序,当所述计算机程序被运行时,实现如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 12 is realized.
  31. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被运行时,实现如权利要求13至24中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 13 to 24 is realized.
  32. 一种芯片,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器相连,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述芯片执行如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法。A chip comprising a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to execute the computer program stored in the memory, so that the chip executes as claimed in claim 1. To the method of any one of 12.
  33. 一种芯片,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器相连,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述芯片执行如权利要求13至24中任一项所述的方法。A chip comprising a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to execute the computer program stored in the memory, so that the chip executes as claimed in claim 13 To the method of any one of 24.
PCT/CN2019/111225 2019-10-15 2019-10-15 Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection WO2021072629A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/111225 WO2021072629A1 (en) 2019-10-15 2019-10-15 Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection
CN201980101251.XA CN114586469B (en) 2019-10-15 2019-10-15 Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/111225 WO2021072629A1 (en) 2019-10-15 2019-10-15 Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021072629A1 true WO2021072629A1 (en) 2021-04-22

Family

ID=75537620

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/111225 WO2021072629A1 (en) 2019-10-15 2019-10-15 Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114586469B (en)
WO (1) WO2021072629A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105530024A (en) * 2014-10-19 2016-04-27 英特尔Ip公司 CONTROLLING SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULE (SIM) ACTIVE STATE IN A MULTIPLE SIMs RADIO
US20170150545A1 (en) * 2015-11-25 2017-05-25 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Optimization of power consumption in dual sim mobiles in connected mode in a wireless network
CN108702797A (en) * 2015-12-31 2018-10-23 高通股份有限公司 Control for the scheduling request of more subscriber identity modules (SIM) wireless telecom equipment
CN108886828A (en) * 2016-01-20 2018-11-23 高通股份有限公司 For executing multiple subscriber identification modules by same carrier frequencies on a wireless communication device(SIM)The system and method for function
CN109691219A (en) * 2016-09-15 2019-04-26 高通股份有限公司 System and method for executing adaptability access procedure on more SIM wireless telecom equipments
CN110249709A (en) * 2017-02-02 2019-09-17 高通股份有限公司 How customized the physical layer of network assistance be shared

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015180134A1 (en) * 2014-05-30 2015-12-03 Apple Inc. Methods and apparatus to reuse wireless circuitry for multiple subscriber identities in a wireless communication device
US20180132289A1 (en) * 2016-11-08 2018-05-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Systems and Methods for Improving Support for Data-Oriented Services in a Multi-Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Wireless Communication Device Having a Designated Data Subscription (DDS)
US10568073B2 (en) * 2016-12-07 2020-02-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Methods and dual SIM dual standby (DSDS) devices for managing data communication

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105530024A (en) * 2014-10-19 2016-04-27 英特尔Ip公司 CONTROLLING SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULE (SIM) ACTIVE STATE IN A MULTIPLE SIMs RADIO
US20170150545A1 (en) * 2015-11-25 2017-05-25 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Optimization of power consumption in dual sim mobiles in connected mode in a wireless network
CN108702797A (en) * 2015-12-31 2018-10-23 高通股份有限公司 Control for the scheduling request of more subscriber identity modules (SIM) wireless telecom equipment
CN108886828A (en) * 2016-01-20 2018-11-23 高通股份有限公司 For executing multiple subscriber identification modules by same carrier frequencies on a wireless communication device(SIM)The system and method for function
CN109691219A (en) * 2016-09-15 2019-04-26 高通股份有限公司 System and method for executing adaptability access procedure on more SIM wireless telecom equipments
CN110249709A (en) * 2017-02-02 2019-09-17 高通股份有限公司 How customized the physical layer of network assistance be shared

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
VIVO (MODERATOR): "Report of phase 1 Multi-SIM email discussion", 3GPP DRAFT; RP-191898_REPORT OF PHASE 1 MULTI-SIM EMAIL DISCUSSION, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. TSG RAN, no. Newport Beach, USA; 20190916 - 20190920, 9 September 2019 (2019-09-09), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, pages 1 - 36, XP051782444 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114586469B (en) 2024-01-05
CN114586469A (en) 2022-06-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11291064B2 (en) Communication method, network node, and radio access network system
US11134532B2 (en) Radio communication system, base station apparatus, and radio terminal
JP6904419B2 (en) Radio access network nodes, core network nodes, and wireless terminals and their methods
KR102463290B1 (en) The method of saving network power in mobile communication systems
US11064557B2 (en) Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection
EP3952591A1 (en) Methods and devices for small data transmission in next generation mobile communication system
WO2018027988A1 (en) Method for selecting network slices, wireless access device and terminal
WO2021169775A1 (en) Data transmission method, and device
KR102124158B1 (en) A method for configuring ue-ambr
JP2019186968A (en) Wireless terminal, base station, and method thereof
TWI688302B (en) Device and method of redirecting a communication device
JPWO2017115452A1 (en) Wireless terminal, wireless station, and methods thereof
US20230180338A1 (en) Communication control method
WO2022011618A1 (en) Information processing method, terminal device, and network device
US20230107139A1 (en) Relay discovery method and terminal
WO2022154716A1 (en) Ue and method for initiating data to be transmitted according to a transmission configuration
WO2021072629A1 (en) Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection
CN114631398A (en) Communication method, communication device and communication system
US11924741B2 (en) Auxiliary routing method, terminal device, and network device
WO2023133839A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2023068356A1 (en) Communication device, base station, and communication method
WO2023068350A1 (en) Communication device, base station, and communication method
WO2023068353A1 (en) Communication device, base station, and communication method
WO2023130362A1 (en) Method and device for transceiving information, and communication system
EP4340248A1 (en) Communication method, terminal device, network device, and communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19949458

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19949458

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1